Muratec MFX2200-2225-2700-2725 PDF

Muratec
MFX-2725/MFX-2225
MFX-2700/MFX-2200
FACSIMILE SYSTEM
FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL

MEUK version 1
5 February, 2008
MURATA MACHINERY, LTD

COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DIV.
Safety Information
LED Safety Label
A LED safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
Battery Precautions
Important: Muratec does not recommend the independent replacement of the batteries. The batteries
are sold only as component parts of the Main Control PCB and Voice PCB, and cannot be
purchased separately from Muratec. Ni-MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries are installed
inside the machine as back up memory batteries. Be sure to dispose of them according to
local, state and federal regulations.
Table of contents
Safety Information...................................................................................................................................a
1 General Description.................................................................................1-1
1.1 Product Description........................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Specifications.................................................................................................................................1-3
2 Machine Composition..............................................................................2-1
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence......................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Recording Section........................................................................................................................2-23
2.3 Image Processing.........................................................................................................................2-24
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram.........................................................................................................2-38
2.5 Block diagrams.............................................................................................................................2-39
2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB.................................................................................................2-42
2.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPS)......................................................................................2-43
2.8 High Voltage Power Supply ........................................................................................................2-44
3 Adjustment Procedures...........................................................................3-1
3.1 Field Service Program Modes........................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment.....................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment..........................................................................................................3-85
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes.......................................................................................3-107
3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment.........................................................................................................3-112
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings....................................................................................3-137
3.7 All RAM Clear.............................................................................................................................3-137
3.8 T.30 Monitor...............................................................................................................................3-138
3.9 Printer maintenance mode.........................................................................................................3-143
3.10 Monitor speaker........................................................................................................................3-144
3.11 Test Modes...............................................................................................................................3-145
3.12 P
rint Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings................................3-150
3.13 Factory Functions.....................................................................................................................3-151
3.14 Line Tests.................................................................................................................................3-157
3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode.................................................................................................3-160
3.16 Consumable order sheet..........................................................................................................3-161
3.17 DRAM Clear.............................................................................................................................3-165
3.18 Clear Life Monitor.....................................................................................................................3-165
3.19 Clear Optional Data..................................................................................................................3-165
3.20 Set Service Code.....................................................................................................................3-166
3.21 Life monitor maintenance.........................................................................................................3-167
3.22 Sensor input test......................................................................................................................3-169
3.23 Printer diagnostic mode............................................................................................................3-172
3.24 Network service mode..............................................................................................................3-173
3.25 Flash Rom Sum Check............................................................................................................3-174
3.26 Printer registration adjustment.................................................................................................3-174
3.27 Set Service Report...................................................................................................................3-175
3.28 Reset Printer Trouble...............................................................................................................3-177
3.29 Cleaning mode.........................................................................................................................3-177
3.30 Voice test..................................................................................................................................3-177
3.31 Network Switch.........................................................................................................................3-178
3.32 Security function maintenance.................................................................................................3-178
3.33 Measuring the black ratio.........................................................................................................3-179
3.34 Service function menu..............................................................................................................3-179
3.35 Quick Initial settings.................................................................................................................3-180
3.36 Update the software.................................................................................................................3-181
4 Troubleshooting Procedures...................................................................4-1
4.1 Troubleshooting Outline.................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Mirror Carriage Error......................................................................................................................4-1
4.3 Recording Paper Jam.....................................................................................................................4-2
4.4 Document Feeder Jam...................................................................................................................4-3

4.5 Service Call Error...........................................................................................................................4-8
4.6 Error Codes..................................................................................................................................4-13
4.7 LCD Failure..................................................................................................................................4-16
4.8 Machine malfunction....................................................................................................................4-17
4.9 The Image Quality Problems........................................................................................................4-27
5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1

5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Re/Disassemble.............................................................................................................................5-4
5.3 Adjustment.................................................................................................................................5-190
6 Options....................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Paper cassette...............................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Conformation Stamp......................................................................................................................6-4
6.3 Page Counter.................................................................................................................................6-5
6.4 PCL printer controller.....................................................................................................................6-6
6.5 OfficeBridge Expansion kit.............................................................................................................6-8
6.6 Network Interface Board...............................................................................................................6-10
6.7 Scanner heater.............................................................................................................................6-12
6.8 Cassette heater............................................................................................................................6-14
ii
1 General Description
1.1 Product Description
５
１４
６
７
１３
９
１２
１０
１１
1 ADF glass 8 Paper loading guide

2 Platen cover 9 Bypass tray
3 Document pad 10 Lower right covers (paper cassette)
4 Document glass 11 Paper level indicator
5 Fuser cover (C2) 12 Paper cassette
6 Right cover 13 Front cover
7 Right cover release lever (C1) 14 Control panel
1-1
15
16
17
23
18
24 19
22
20
21
15 Paper output area 20 External telephone line jack

16 Ventilation slot 21 Telephone line jack
17 Power switch 22 USB port
18 Power jack 23 10Base-T/100Base-Tx port*
19 Handset jack 24 Additional phone line jack
Equipment and components shown with * are optional.
7
5
4
3
2
1 Drum cartridge lock lever (B4) 5 Toner cartridge

2 Drum cartridge 6 Drum cartridge lock lever (B3)
3 The charging needle cleaning rod (B7) 7 Feeder roller release lever
4 LED print head cleaning rod (B6)
1-2
1.2 Specifications
Item Specifications / Comments
Type Desktop type
Telephone network PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or equivalent.
Compatibility ITU-T T.4 and T.30
Coding method ITU-T-standard MH, MR, MMR and JBIG
Modem speed 33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400,
12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 and 2400 bps
Dual Access Allows up to three simultaneous operations.
LCD LCD: 15 characters x 5 lines (Touch panel : bottom line only)
Language: English, German
Scanning method Black and White
Recording method Dry electrophotographic (LED) printer
Acceptable document size <ADF, RADF>
Single sheet Two or more sheets
Max: 297 (W) x 432 (L) mm 297 (W) x 420 (L) mm
Min: 120 (W) x 100 (L) mm 148 (W) x 105 (L) mm
Paper weight: 35 – 128 g/m2 52 – 105 g/m2
Thickness: 0.05 – 0.15 mm 0.07 – 0.12 mm
<FBS glass>
Max: 297 (W) x 420 (L) mm
Min: No limit
ADF capacity A4 : 50 sheets, B4 : 40 sheets, A3 : 30 sheets
RADF capacity A4 : 50 sheets, B4 : 25 sheets, A3 : 25 sheets
Scanning resolution <Transmission>
horizontal x vertical (in dots/inch x in lines/inch)
Normal: 203 x 98
Fine: 203 x 196
Super fine: 406 x 392* or 600dpi × 600lpi
Grayscale: 203 x 196
*: In the case that the remote fax has the ability of “406 x 392”. If not, the
superfine resolution is “203 x 392“, and the grayscale resolution in feeder
transmission is “203 × 196”.
<Copy>
600 x 600 dpi
<Scanner>
200 dpi 200 dpi x 200 lpi
Effective Scanning width 294 mm (Fax), 297 mm (Copy)
Transmission speed Under 3 seconds (Super G3)
Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax
machine.
Document Memory 64 MB (4665 pages)
Document memory 72 hours
backup
The backup battery requires about 24 hours to reach full charge after
power to the fax unit is restored.
Printing resolution 600 dpi
1-3
Printing speed MFX-2720 MFX-2200
MFX-2725 MFX-2225
Simplex 27 ppm 22 ppm
Duplex 9 spm 8 spm
(When loading A4-sized paper from 1st paper cassette.)
Toner yield Approx.��
10,000 or 20,000 sheets
(A4, 6�
�� %
�� document
��
coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)
Drum yield Approx. 10��
0��
,000 pages
(A4, paper under 3-pages interval printing.)
Print margin Reading edge, Trailing edge, Left edge and Right edge: 3 ��
mm
Acceptable recording Simplex printing
paper <Paper cassette>
A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF), F4, 8K, 16K,
16K(LEF), Letter, Letter(LEF), Legal, 11x17, Half-letter, Half-letter(LEF),
Executive, Executive(LFE)
Paper weight: 60 – 90g/m2
<Bypass tray>
Plain paper: ��
A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF), F4,
8K, 16K, 16K(LEF), Letter, Letter(LEF), Legal, 11x17,
Half-letter, Half-letter(LEF), Executive, Executive(LFE)
Postcard
Envelopes: DL, COM10, Monarch
Transparency
Custom size: (90 – 297 mm) x��
��
(140 – 432 mm) (Width x��
��
Length)
Paper weight: 60 – 90g/m2
Duplex printing
Plain paper: A3, B4, A4, A4��
��
(LEF), B5, B5(LEF)��
, A5(LEF)
Recording paper capacity <Paper cassette>
500 sheets
<Bypass tray>
Plain paper: 100 sheet
Postcard/Transparency: 30 sheets
Envelopes 10 sheets
Receive paper tray Approx. 250 sheets
capacity
Printouts exit Face down
Environmental conditions Ambient temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C
Relative humidity: 20 % to 80 % with no condensation
Power requirements 23��
0 VAC
�� ±�� 10
��
%; 50
��
Hz
1-4
Power MFX-2720 MFX-2725
consumption MFX-2200 MFX-2225
Sleep mode (W) 8.5 8.2
Energy save mode (W) 20 20
Standby (Wh) 57 48
Memory Transmission (W) 21 62
Reception (W) 920 930
Copying (W) 920 960
Maximum (W) 920 980
Dimensions MFX-2700 1 cassette 597.2 x 679.7 x 626.5 mm

MFX-2200 4 cassettes 597.2 x 679.7 x 998.5 mm
MFX-2725 1 cassette 600.3 x 686.9 x 634.8 mm
MFX-2225 4 cassettes 600.3 x 686.9 x 1006.8 mm
Weight MFX-2720 1 cassette Approx. 55.8 kg

MFX-2320 4 cassettes Approx. 88.8 kg
MFX-2725 1 cassette Approx. 57.8 kg
MFX-2225 4 cassettes Approx. 90.8 kg
without consumables
Optional • Second, third and fourth paper cassette
products • Conformation stamp
• Mechanical page counter
• PCL printer controller
• Network interface board
• OfficeBridge board
• Scanner heater
• Cassette heater
1-5
2 Machine Composition
ADF model (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)
45 6 7 8 9
2
1 10
42
11
41
40
12
39 13
14
15
16
38
17
37 18
19
36 20
35 21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
34 33 32 31
1 Feed roller 22 Transfer roller

2 DS2 23 Magnet roller
3 Press roller 24 Regist roller
4 DRS 25 Regist shaft
5 Exit roller 26 Pickup MP roller
6 Separator roller 27 Separator roller
7 DW2 28 Ritard roller
8 DW1 29 Pickup roller
9 DL1 30 Feed roller
10 Lens 31 Agitator paddle
11 CCD 32 Agitator screw A
12 Exit roller A 33 Agitator screw B
13 Exit roller B 34 Toner screw B
14 Cleaning roller 35 Toner agitator paddle
15 Heat roller 36 Toner screw A
16 Lamp Heater 37 Ozone filter
17 Press fuser roller 38 Fan
18 Cleaner blade 39 Mirror C
19 Charge unit 40 Mirror A
20 OPC drum 41 Mirror B
21 LED head 42 Lamp
2-1
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence
2.1.1 ADF Detection (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)
When a document is placed into the document feeder, Document Sensor 1 (DS1) is activated and you
will hear the short beep. The width of document is detected by DW1and DW2 and length of document
is detected by DL1sensor.
The document will be transferred when the start key is pressed. The motor drives clutch 1 (CL1) with
the gear for the pick up roller to turn.
Document separation is the process that allows a multi-page document to go through the scanner one
page at a time. The top document is separated from the remaining documents by the friction of the
separate roller.
Following the document separation, the separate roller causes the document to advance. During this
feed, clutch 2 (CL2) is set to off not to supply power of the motor to the feed roller. A loop is made
by the transfer roller, which prevents the document to skew. As it advances, the leading edge of
the document activates the DS2 sensor. Once DS2 is activated, the feed roller continues to rotate
until the document reaches the scan position. The machine uses the distance from DS2 to the scan
position and the diameter of the feed roller to determine the number of rotations necessary to feed the
document to the scan position.
When the document reaches the scan position, the light from the scanner lamp strikes the face of the
document and is reflected into the lens through mirrors A, B, and C. In case the light intensity along
the length of the scanner lamp is not uniform, shading compensation is provided to ensure even
illumination.
As the reflected image passes through the lens, it is focused onto the charged coupled device (CCD).
The CCD then converts the dark and light areas of the image into electrical impulses, or image data.
When DS2 detects the trailing edge of the document, the image signal output is turned off. The
scanner continues to remain active for a few more seconds in case there is another document to
follow.
The scanned document is discharged through the document exit by the exit roller.
Document detection (ADF)

The sizes of the documents are detected by the following two sensors;
Detection Action Sensor

Document presence Detects whether there is a document DS1
on the tray or not
Leading and trailing edge Detects the leading and trailing edge of DS2, DRS
detection the feeding document
Document size detection
• length Detects the length of the document on DL1
the tray
• width Detects the width of the document on the DW1, DW2
tray
2-2
2.1.2 FBS section
The FBS (Flat Bet Scanner) section consists of document glass (pain), the optical reading section
(Carriage A Assy, Carriage B Assy and scanner frame Assy) and scanner driving section.
The document size detection stars when the BIS sensor is on. The detection of whether the FBS
cover is closed is made by the APS sensor.
Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a reduced image on
the CCD Sensor as the Scanner Motor moves the Scanner. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern
(image data) into an electrical image signal.
The electrical image signal is then output to the Main Board.
Exposure Section: Construction and Function
2
1
1
1 Reflector Tape
The Reflector Tape reflects the light from the Exposure Lamp and supplements its illumination.
2 Exposure Lamp
A Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL) is used to illuminate the original.
3 Mirror
Directs the reflected light from the original to the lens.
2-3
Scanner frame Moving Mechanism
<Carriage A>
• During a scan, the Carriage A projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp onto the
entire surface of the original. The light is reflected from the original to the Mirror A of the Carriage A
and then to the Mirror B and Mirror C of the Carriage B.
• The Carriage A is driven by the FBS Motor and front and rear Scanner Drive belts.
• Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode.
• The Carriage A is at home position when Scanner Home Position Sensor is blocked. This position
serves as the reference for the scan motion.
<Carriage B>
• The Mirror B and Mirror C are mounted to their holder at right angles to each other. They direct the
light reflected off the Mirror A through the lens to the CCD.
• The Carriage B is also moved by the Scanner Drive belts and pulleys driven by the FBS Motor.
It travels at a speed half that of the Carriage A, thereby keeping constant the optical path length
between the Original Glass and lens.
5
4 6
7
3
2 8
9
10
13 11
12
1 APS sensor 8 PCB CCD

2 BIS sensor 9 Caridge A
3 Caridge B 10 Lamp
4 Document size detection sensor 11 Mirror A
5 FBS motor 12 Home sensor
6 Inverter 13 Mirror B and C
7 Lens
2-4
Document size detection (FBS)
When the machine is in Auto Paper or Auto Size, the document length detecting sensor mounted in
the FBS section receive light reflected off the original to allow the machine to determine the document
length size.
And the CCD detects document width by reflecting light from the Exposure Lamp.
Document size Multi Beam Sensor CCD
(Length detection) (Width detection)
A4  
A4 
A5 
A5 
B4  
B5  
B5 
A3  
: Means that the unit is used.
2-5
2.1.3 RADF section (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)
Cross-section
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[12]
[15]
[14] [13] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7]
[1] Lower registration roller

[2] Upper registration roller
[3] Separation roller
[4] Separation pad
[5] Pickup roller
[6] Document supply tray
[7] Upper delivery reversal roller
[8] Lower delivery reversal roller
[9] Read roller 2 (lower)
[10] Read roller 2 (upper)
[11] Platen roller
[12] Read roller
[13] Read roller 1 (upper)
[14] Read roller 1 (lower)
[15] White sheet
2-6
Outline of Electrical Components
Electric Parts Layout/Functions
<Sensors>
The names in
Symbol Name Relay PCB ADF driver PCB
Sensor Text
PI1 Document width sensor 2(directly mounted CN7 DW2
on the Relay PCB)
PI2 Document width sensor 1 (directly CN7 DW1
mounted on the Relay PCB)
PI3 Last document detection sensor CN32 CN7 LAST
PI4 Document length sensor 1 CN32 CN7 DL1
PI5 Document length sensor 2 CN32 CN7 DL2
PI6 Delivery reversal sensor CN8 EXIT
PI7 Read sensor CN8 DS2
PI8 Registration paper sensor CN8 DRS
PI10 Cover open/close sensor CN9 TXIL
PI11 Document set sensor CN9 DS1
PI2 PI5
PI3
PI10
PI4
PI11
PI7
PI6
PI1
PI8
<Motors, Clutch, Solenoids, PCBs, etc.>

Symbol Name Function ADF driver PCB
M1 Motor Feed motor CN4
M2 Pickup motor CN11
SL1 Solenoid Roller release solenoid CN5
SL2 Stamp solenoid CN6
PCB1 ADF driver PCB RADF control
PCB2 Relay PCB Repeating for sensors in CN7
document pickup tray/Document
width detection
PCB1
M1
M2 PCB2
SL1
SL2
2-7
Basic Construction
Electric circuits of the RADF are controlled by the Scanner RADF PCB and Main PCB.The Main PCB
detects the signals received from the host machine to output the signals that drive DC loads such as
motors and solenoids at the predetermined timings. The Main PCB does not have a memory area;
data (service mode, etc.) is stored in the Main PCB.
Motor
ADF driver PCB Sensor
Solenoid
CN1 CN2 CN10
+3.3V
+24V
P151 P150
P140A
P14A
Scanner RADF PCB
P1408
Main PCB
P14B
2-8
Basic Operation
Drive Mechanism and Signals

The RADF is a document feeder exclusively for stream reading.
The RADF uses two motors to pick up and feed document paper.
Name (symbol) Function

Feed motor (M1) Feeds documents.
Pickup motor (M2) Separates and feeds documents.
The drive mechanism and signals are shown below.
[1]
(SIZE�W2)CN7‑6
(SIZE�W1)CN7‑5
(STMP�SOL)CN6‑2
(RK�SOL)CN5‑2
(SIZE�L1)CN7‑2
(SIZE�L2)CN7‑1
(LAST)CN7‑3
(READ)CN8‑6
(REG)CN8‑3
CN11
(EXIT)CN8‑9
(EMPTY)CN9‑3
CN4
[10]
[12]
[11]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[13]
[14]
PI11
PI7
PI8
PI6
PI4
PI5
PI3
PI1
PI2
2
[15]
[1] ADF driver PCB

[2] Document detection signal
[3] Document detection signal
[4] Pickup motor drive signal
[5] Document placement signal
[6] Stamp solenoid drive signal
[7] Document placement signal
[8] Feed motor drive signal
[9] Roller release solenoid drive signal
[10] Last document detection signal
[11] Paper size (width) identification signal 1
[12] Paper size (width) identification signal 2
[13] Paper size (length) identification signal 1
[14] Paper size (length) identification signal 2
[15] Relay PCB
2-9
Outline of Operation Mode
The RADF has four operation modes. The RADF operates in the operation mode specified by the host
machine to perform printing. Operation mode names, brief outline of operations, and associated print
modes are given in the following table:
Operation mode name Outline of operation Associated print mode

[1] Forward pickup/delivery Picks up, reads, and then Single-sided document >
delivers an document. Simplex printing
Single-sided document >
Duplex printing
(This operation is performed
for documents with the same
width/different width.)
[2] Forward feed/reversal Picks up, reads, reverses, and Double-sided document >
delivery delivers an document. Duplex printing
Double-sided document >
Simplex printing
(This operation is performed
for documents with the same
width/different width.)
Forward Pickup/Delivery (Single-sided document > Simplex Printing) Operation

The document flows as shown below.
Note: This operation is performed for all single-sided documents irrespective of whether document
widths are the same or different.
Document
Pickup Delivery
Formation of loop End of job
Waiting for reading
Reading
2-10
Forward Pickup/Reversal Delivery (Double-sided document > Duplex printing) Operation
The document flow is shown below.
Note: This operation is performed for all double-sided documents irrespective of whether document
widths are the same or different.
Document
Pickup Feed
Formation of loop Reversal
Waiting for reading Formation of loop
Reading Waiting for reading
to next page
Reverse side reading Feed
Feed Idle feed
Reversal Delivery
Feed End of job
2-11
Document Detection
Outline
The RADF detects a document using either one of the two methods depending on the print mode.
- Normal print mode (other than mixed size print mode and banner paper mode)
- Mixed size print mode and banner paper mode
a. Normal print mode (other than mixed size print mode and banner paper mode)
In the normal print mode, the following four document detection functions are used:
Function Description Sensor used (symbol)
Document presence/ Detects whether there is an document Document set sensor (PI11)
absence detection on the document pickup tray.
Last document detection Detects whether the document being Last document detection sensor
picked up is the last one. (PI3)
Initial document size
detection
- Longitudinal direction Detects the length of the document Document length sensor 1/2
placed on the document pickup tray. (PI4/ PI5)
- Lateral direction Detects the width of the document Document width sensor 1/2 (PI2/
placed on the document pickup tray. PI1)
b. Mixed size print mode and banner paper mode

In the mixed size print mode and banner paper mode, the following three document detection
functions are used:
Function Description Sensor used (symbol)
Document presence/ Detects whether there is a document Document set sensor (PI11)
absence detection on the document pickup tray.
Last document detection Detects whether the document being Last document detection sensor
picked up is the last one. (PI3)
Document length detection Detects the document length Read sensor (PI7)
according to the distance from the
position where the read sensor (PI7)
turns on to the position where the
read sensor (I7) turns off.
Document Presence/Absence Detection

The Document set sensor (PI11) detects presence/absence of a document on the document tray.
When a document is placed on the document tray, the detection lever moves the light shielding plate
to allow light to pass thorough the photo interrupter. Thus, the Document set sensor (PI11) generates
an document detection signal (EMPTY) to notify the host machine that an document is placed on the
document tray via the ADF driver PCB.
ADF driver PCB

EMPTY
Detection lever Document
PI11
2-12
Detection of Last Document
The last document detection sensor (PI3) and Document set sensor (PI11) detect whether the
document being picked up is the last one.
When the trailing edge of the last document has moved past the last document detection lever, the
detection lever moves the light shielding plate to allow light pass through the photo interrupter. Thus,
the last document detection sensor (PI3) generates a last document detection signal (LAST). When
the last document has moved past the document sensor (PI11), an document absence signal (EMPTY)
is generated to notify the host machine that an document being picked up is the last one via the ADF
driver PCB.
ADF driver PCB
EMPTY
Detection
LAST
lever
Document
PI11
PI3
Initial Document Size Detection

The document length sensor 1 (PI4) and document length detection sensor 2 (PI5) detect the
longitudinal size of the document placed on the document tray, and the document width sensor 1 (PI2)
and document width sensor 2 (PI1) detect the lateral size of the document.
When an document is placed on the document tray, detection levers of the two document length
sensors move the light shielding plate to allow light pass through the photo interrupter.
If the slide guide is adjusted to the document size, the two document width sensors mounted inside
the document tray are shielded by the light shielding plate mounted at the bottom of the slide guide.
Document sizes are determined by the combination of the ON/OFF states of document length sensors
and the combination of ON/OFF states of document width sensors.
PI5
PI4
PI2
PI1
2-13
The following tables show the relationships among document width sensors, document length
sensors, and document sizes.
1. AB type
Sensor name
Document width Document width Document length Document length
sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor 1 sensor 2
A3 ON ON ON ON
B4 OFF ON ON ON
A4R OFF OFF ON OFF
B5R ON OFF ON OFF
Size A4 ON ON OFF OFF
A5R ON OFF OFF OFF
B5 OFF ON OFF OFF
A5 OFF OFF OFF OFF
B6 ON OFF OFF OFF
2. Inch type
Sensor name
Document width Document width Document length Document length
sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor 1 sensor 2
11 x 17 - ON ON ON
LGL - OFF ON ON
Size LTRR - OFF ON OFF
LTR - ON OFF OFF
STMT - OFF OFF OFF
2-14
Document Pickup/Separation
Basic Pickup Operation
With a document placed on the document tray, pressing the print start key will picks up the document
in the following manner.
a. Pickup operation
When the pickup motor (M2) turns in reverse direction, the pickup roller unit lowers to rotate the
pickup rollers, thus feeding the document. The stopper rises in conjunction with the pickup roller unit.
The separation sheet and pad are used to prevent multiple sheets from being fed together.
M2 M2
Pickup roller unit Pickup roller unit

One-way One-way
clutch Document clutch Document
Stopper Separation pad Separation sheet
b. Formation of loop
While the pickup motor (M2) is turning in the reverse direction, the document is fed against the
registration roller that is stopped by the idling one-way clutch to form a loop, thus preventing the
document from skewing.
Registration Loop formation 1
roller
c. Feed
The pickup motor (M2) and feed motor (M1) turn in the forward direction to raise the paper pickup
roller unit, feeding the document to the read standby point with the registration roller and read roller.
When the document reaches the read standby point, the pickup motor (M2) and feed motor (M1) stop.
Registration
roller
M1 M2
Read roller Read standby point
2-15
d. Stream reading
When the leading edge of the document reaches the read standby point, an image leading edge
signal is sent to the host machine to start stream reading. Stream reading is a scan mode in which the
document is moved on the optical system's glass using the platen roller.
The read image is stored in the memory of the host machine.
M1
Platen roller
LED
Read glass
Pickup Unit and Stopper

The pickup unit consists of a pickup roller and separation roller. When the print start key is pressed or
an document pickup signal is input, the pickup motor (M2) turns in the reverse direction to lower the
pickup unit, turning the pickup roller and separation roller to feed the document. The stopper rises in
conjunction with the pickup unit. When the document is picked up, the separation pad and separation
plate prevent multiple sheets from being fed together.
When the document is looped at the registration roller, the pickup motor turns in the forward direction
to raise the pickup unit, feeding the document with the registration roller. At this time, the separation
roller drive shaft driven via the spring one-way clutch stops at the upper limit of the pickup unit and the
friction against the document forces the separation roller to rotate with the aid of the one-way clutch.
Stopper arm
Document
Pickup roller
Stopper arm
Pickup motor (M2)
Feed roller
Separation pad
2-16
Pickup Timing
Start key ON
or
document pickup
signal input
Document
placement
Document
separation/feed Document reading
Document set
sensor (PI11)
Registration paper
sensor (PI8)
Read sensor (PI7)
Delivery reversal
sensor (PI6)
Loop formation Read standby
Pickup motor (M2)
Reverse rotation
Feed motor (M1) Forward rotation
Image leading
edge signal
: Reverse rotation of motor
Pickup Motor (M2) Control

The pickup motor (M2) control circuit diagram is shown below. A 2-phase stepping motor is used to
feed documents. This circuit mainly performs the following
types of control:
- Motor ON/OFF control
- Motor rotation direction control
- Motor speed control
+24V
KMOT_A CN11
IC2 KMOT_A* KMOT_A 4
IC1
KMOT_B 5 M2
MD0008 Motor KMOT_A* 6
P151
CN1
KMOT_B* driver
KMOT_IA KMOT_B
3
KMOT_IB 2
KMOT_B*
1
Scanner
RADF PCB ADF driver PCB
The pickup motor of the RADF is controlled by MD0008(IC2) on the Scanner RADF PCB. The
MD0008(IC2) on the Scanner RADF PCB outputs drive pulses to the pickup motor according to the
selected print mode (magnification, operation mode, timing, etc.).
The pickup motor is a stepping motor. Its rotation direction and speed are controlled by changing the
order of output pulses (KMOT_A, KMOT_A*, KMOT_B, and KMOT_B*) and frequency.
2-17
Document Reversing
Basic Operation
There are two types of document reversal operation: one that is performed from the top to the reverse
side of the document and the other that is performed from the reverse side to the top of the document.
Since the basic operation methods are identical, only the reversal operation performed from the
reverse side to the top is discussed below.
a. Top side pickup

The feed motor (M1) drives the read roller and platen roller to scan the surface of the document. After
completion of reading, the delivery reversal roller feeds the document to the delivery unit.
M1 M1
Delivery reversal roller
SL1 SL1
Platen roller
Read roller
b. Reversal/feed 1
When the trailing edge of the fed document moves past the delivery reversal sensor (PI6), the feed
motor (M1) stops. Immediately after this, the feed motor start turning in the reverse direction to feed
the document to the registration roller, then stops. At this time, the roller release solenoid (SL1) turns
on to release the pressure of the delivery reversal roller.
M1 M1
SL1
Delivery reversal sensor
c. Reversal/feed 2
The feed motor (M1) turns to feed the document to the read standby point and stops.
Thus, the document has been reversed. Next, the document is picked up again and read, turning off
the roller separation solenoid. After this, the document is reversed again, fed, and delivered.
Registration
roller
M1
M1 M2
SL1
Read roller Read standby point
2-18
Operation Sequence
Start key ON
or
document pickup
signal input
Document
placement
Document Document's
Document Document
separation reverse
reading reversal side reading
/feed
Document set
sensor (PI11)
Registration paper
sensor (PI8)
Read sensor (PI7)
Delivery reversal
sensor (PI6)
Loop formation
Pickup motor (M2) Read standby
Reverse rotation Reversal standby Loop formation

Roller release
solenoid (SL1)
Image leading
edge signal
Document Feeding/Delivery
Basic Operation
After stream reading on the document glass, the document is delivered to the document delivery unit
as discussed below.
a. Document feed/delivery
After moving past the reading position, the document is fed by the delivery reversal roller driven by the
feed motor (M1) turning in the forward direction. The deliver reversal motor is normally pressurized;
the roller release solenoid turns on only when the document is reversed for duplex printing.
M1 M1

SL1 SL1
Reading position
2-19
Operation Sequence
Start key ON
or
document pickup
signal input
Document
placement
Document Document reading

separation/feed Document delivery
Document set
sensor (PI11)
Registration paper
sensor (PI8)
Read sensor (PI7)
Delivery reversal
sensor (PI6)
Pickup motor (M2)
Reverse rotation
Roller release
solenoid (SL1)
Image leading
edge signal
Feed Motor (M1) Control

The feed motor (M1) control circuit diagram is shown below. The feed motor (M1) is a 2-phase
stepping motor. This circuit mainly performs the following types of control:
- Motor ON/OFF control

- Motor rotation direction control
- Motor speed control
+24V
RMOT_A CN4
IC50 RMOT_A* RMOT_A 4
IC2
RMOT_B Motor 5 M1
MD0008 RMOT_A* 6
P151
driver
CN1
RMOT_B*
RMOT_IA RMOT_B
3
RMOT_IB 2
RMOT_B*
1
Scanner
RADF PCB ADF driver PCB
The feed motor of the RADF is controlled by the MD0008(IC50) on the Scanner RADF PCB. The
MD0008(IC50) on the Scanner RADF PCB outputs drive pulses to the feed motor according to the
selected print mode (magnification, operation mode, timing, etc.).
The feed motor is a stepping motor. Its rotation direction and speed are controlled by changing the
order of output pulses (RMOT_A, RMOT_A*, RMOT_B, and RMOT_B*) and frequency.
2-20
Detecting Jams
Jam
The RADF detects a jam using the sensors shown below. Document jam check timings are stored in
the ROM on the Main PCB to check whether a jam has occurred according to presence/absence of
the document at the relevant sensor position.
PI10
PI11
PI7
PI6
PI8
PI6: Delivery reversal sensor

PI7: Read sensor
PI8: Registration paper sensor
PI10: Cover open/close sensor
PI11: Document set sensor
Power Supply
Power Supply
The power supply lines are shown below.
The RADF is powered via two power supply lines (24 V and 3.3 V) from the host machine.
- Motor
24V 24V
CN10
- Solenoid
Host
machine
3.3V 3.3V
CN2
- Sensor
ADF driver PCB
2-21
Stamp Operation
Outline
If the stamp function is selected in the FAX mode of the host machine, the stamp solenoid drive signal
(STMP_SOL) from the ADF driver PCB drives the stamp solenoid (SL2) to affix a stamp indicating that
the document has been read or sent.
Document
Stamp solenoid drive signal

Stamp solenoid (SL2)
ADF driver PCB STMP_SOL
In the stamp mode, the feed speed is set to 118 mm/s after completion of document reading. The
document stops when it has been fed 21.45 mm since detection of tuning off of the delivery reversal
sensor, where the stamp is printed. The solenoid drive time is 50 ms, and the stamp is affixed at the
position which is about 10 mm away from the trailing edge of paper.
Start key ON
or
document pickup
signal input
Document
placement
Document Document reading Document delivery

separation/feed
Document set
sensor (PI11)
Registration paper
sensor (PI8)
Read sensor (PI7)
Delivery reversal
sensor (PI6)
Pickup motor (M2)
Reverse rotation
Roller release
solenoid (SL1)
Image leading
edge signal
Stamp solenoid
(SL2)
Note: Fresh out of the package, the stamp cartridge is good for about 7,000 documents.
2-22
2.2 Recording Section
Recording Paper Feed Path
A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickup
roller.
The paper is moved along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller, then fed by the rotation
of the register roller.
If there is a duplex printing unit, the machine can print both sides of the paper (duplex printing).
When the first side of the paper is printed, it is transferred to the exit. However after a few steps after
Switchback (SWBK) sensor detected the trailing edge, the exit roller rolls in reverse and the paper is
transferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers.
It reaches to the image transfer area turned inside out, and the duplex side of the paper is printed.
2-23
2.3 Image Processing
The fax incoming data, copy data or pirnt data is sent to the printer for image processing.
12. Paper Exit 11. Fusing
9. Cleaning
10. Erase
2. Drum Charging
8. Discharge Plage
3. LED Exposure 1. OPC Drum
7. Image Transfer
4. Development
6. Manual Bypass
5. Paper Feed
The image processing is roughly divided into the following steps:

1. OPC Drum
Changes the image of the original projected onto the surface of the OPC drum to a corresponding
electrostatic latent image.
2. Drum Charge
Generates a negative DC charged layer on the surface of the OPC Drum.
3. Drum Exposure
The LED light strikes the surface of the OPC Drum, creating an electrostatic latent image.
4. Development
Negatively charged toner adheres to the latent image on the OPC Drum surface. DC negative bias
voltages are applied to the Sleeve/Magnet rollers, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the
background.
5. Paper Feed
Feeds sheets of paper from the appropriate paper source.
6. Bypass Paper Feed
Feeds sheets of paper from the bypass source.
7. Image Transfer
A positive charge is applied to the Transfer roller to transfer the visible image on the surface of the
OPC Drum onto the paper.
8. Discharge Plate
The discharge plate removes the potential charge from paper.
9. Cleaning
Residual toner is scraped off the surface of the OPC Drum.
10. Erase
The OPC Drum is exposed to light, which effectively neutralize any residual charge on the surface
of the OPC Drum.
11. Fusing
Heat and pressure fuse toner on the paper .
12. Paper Exit
Feeds paper out of the MFP onto the exit tray.
2-24
2.3.1 LED exposure
Location of the unit
The LED exposure area depends on the paper size. The image lacks each edge of the paper for 3mm
because of non-exposure area.
3mm 3mm
3mm
3mm
2-25
2.3.2 Drum Cartridge
The drum cartridge consists of charge section / drum / developing section / cleaning section.
1 2 3 4 5
10 9
1 Eraser 6 OPC Drum
2 Charge unit 7 Magnet roller
3 Waste toner screw 8 Agitator paddle
4 Cleaner blade 9 Agitator screw A
5 Waste toner paddle 10 Agitator screw B
2-26
2.3.3 Drum charge
• The OPC Drum Charge Corona has a grid mesh to deposit a charge evenly across the surface of
the OPC Drum.
• The corona unit has a comb electrode that discharges only toward the grid mesh, thus minimizing
the amount of ozone produced.
2-27
2.3.4 Development
The toner supplied from the toner cartridge is stirred by the agitator and paddle, and is transferred to
the developing roller.
The developing roller consists of a magnet roller and a sleeve roller turning around it. The developing
roller transfers the toner to the OPC drum.
The toner on the drum surface is controlled by the developing bias on the developing roller.
ATDC sensor
The ATDC sensor is at the bottom of the toner cartridge. The toner density (T/D) in the developing unit
is detected by a magnetic permeability sensor. When the toner density becomes low, the RX motor
rotates the screw in the toner hopper and supplies the toner to the developing unit. The sensor is
adjusted when the drum cartridge is replaced.
2-28
2.3.5 Cleaning the OPC drum
The cleaner blade is pressed against the OPC drum surface to scrape toner off the surface.
The eraser lamp lights the drum surface to neutralize the potential of the OPC drum after the image
transfer.
1 2
3
1 Eraser 3 OPC Drum
2 Cleaner blade
2-29
2.3.6 Toner Cartridge
Toner cartridge structure

The toner in the toner cartridge is transferred to the screw by the toner agitator paddle sheet which is
on the toner agitator paddle. The paddle rotates by TP motor. The toner screw A is also rotating and
transfers the toner to the discharger.
1 2
3
1 Toner agitator paddle 3 Toner screw A

2 Toner agitator paddle sheet 4 Discharger
2-30
Toner hopper structure
A piezoelectric vibrating sensor detects the remaining toner. The toner is stirred by the agitator. The
toner in the hopper is transferred to the drum cartridge by the rotating screw.
1 2
3
1 Toner sensor 3 Screw

2 Agitator
Waste Toner collection

The toner pressed against the OPC drum is scratched by the cleaning blade, and transferred to the
waste toner collection area located at the bottom of the toner cartridge by the waste toner collection
screw. The toner in the collection area is design to accumulate evenly by the toner screw B.
1
2
1 Opening 2 Toner screw B
2-31
Toner transferring mechanism
2
1
3
4
5
1 Toner cartridge 4 Drum cartridge
2 Toner hopper 5 Toner collection route
3 Toner supply route
2-32
2.3.7 Image Transfer
Structure
A charge is applied to the Transfer roller to transfer the toner image formed on the surface of the OPC
drum onto the paper.
The image transfer current is controlled according to the size and type of paper ,whether the copy
cycle is 1-sided or 2-sided, temperature and humidity .
The surface of theTransfer Roller is cleaned by applying the same negative polarity as the toner.
2-33
Discharger Brush
To neutralize any charge potential left in the paper which has undergone the image transfer stage,
there is the Discharge Brush fitted to the guide plate after the Transfer Roller.
Drum Scrapers
The drum scrapers mounted in the drum cartridge properly separate paper from the surface of the
OPC drum.
2-34
2.3.8 Fusing
The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed.

A heat roller system is used as the fusing system. The heat roller is heated by the lamp heater inside
the roller. The toner image is securely fixed by the pressure between the heat roller and press fuser
roller.
A thermistor detects and controls the heater roller’s temperature.
1 2 3 4
9 8 7 6 5
1 Cleaning roller 6 Paper
2 Heat roller 7 Non-fused toner
3 Paper separate blade 8 Lamp heater
4 Fused toner 9 Thermistor
5 Press fuser roller
2-35
The cleaning roller cleans the dirt of the heat roller. It is driven by the heat roller and rotates at a
circumferential velocity of 0.625 times faster than the heat roller.
2 3 4 5
1 Press roller 4 Thermistor
2 Heat roller 5 Thermal fuse
3 Thermostat
2-36
2.3.9 Paper supply
The main motor drives the pickup roller and the paper feed roller to supply paper.
The pickup roller transfers the paper and the paper feed roller and separate roller separates oen sheet
of paper and fed into the main unit.
When the paper cassette is closed, the lever is pushed to lower the pickup roller.
The Liftup upper limit sensor detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised.
The paper empty sensor detects when paper in the cassette runs out.
1 Lever 4 Paper feed roller

2 Pickup roller 5 Separate roller
3 Liftup upper limit sensor 6 Paper empty sensor
2-37
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram
See the attached files.
2-38
2.5 Block diagrams
ADF model (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)
PCB MAIN PCB NCU DAA
PCBVOICE IC35
RJ11
PCB PANEL IC2 MMD5020
IC1 SH7706
MSM6650 MODEM V34
LCD CPU
Gate
PANEL-A
IC7 64Mb Option Option
RJ11
PANEL-B IC5 32Mb
FLASH ROM 2ndLINE 2ndLINE
FLASH ROM
MODEM NCU
IC9 (*1)
-B
System Bus
256Mb-SDRAM Ni-MH battery
Option Option
RJ45
RJ45
EX memory (*1) (System Memory)
Office Bridge Pro or NIC
256Mb-SDRAM (Document Memory)
WS-550 NP-400
(ECM Buffer)
(MODEM Buffer) PCB SCANER PCB CCD
Option
SPEAKER Audio PCL IC2
Gate
IC5 AFE
System Bus
IC8 (*2) OP-550 CCD 600dpi

1Mb-SRAM Lithium battery
Gate
IC2 MD0008 Inverter Lamp
IMAGE
Gate
Compact IC6 MD0002 PROCESSING
Flash Memory Image
IC2 MD0010 SYSTEM ASIC Memory IC1 FBS
Control Driver. MOTOR
PSU-200E
System Bus Controller
Image Bus Controller

CODEC RES. CONV PCB ADF
POWER ADF
SUPPLY (COMM) (COMM) IC13 IC1 MOTOR PRINTER
256Mb-SDRAM Driver.
CODEC (Image Memory) UNIT
Power (Scanner) PCB PRT
Saved
CODEC RES. CONV
Main
(Printer) (Smoothing)
MOTOR1
Option
Gate
VIDEO I/F PCB LPH
USB 1.1 I/F LED I/F IC1 Main
CON LPH control MOTOR2
(*1) Cpmmected to the Ni-MH battery PCB CASSETTE

LED HEAD HIGH VOLTAGE
(*2) Cpmmected to the Lithium battery POWER SUPPLY
RADF model (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)

PCB NCU DAA
PCB MAIN PCB VOICE
IC35
PCB PANEL IC2 MMD5020
RJ11
IC1 SH7706 MSM6650 MODEM V34

LCD CPU
Gate
PANEL -A
PANEL -B IC7 64Mb Option Option
IC5 32Mb
RJ11
FLASH ROM 2nd LINE 2nd LINE

FLASH ROM
MODEM NCU
IC9 (*1)
Ni-MH battery
System Bus-B
256Mb-SDRAM
EX memory (*1) Option Option
RJ45
RJ45
(System Memory)
256Mb-SDRAM Office Bridge Pro or NIC
(Document Memory)
OB-550 NP-400
512Mb-SDRAM (ECM Buffer)
(MODEM Buffer)
32MB or 64MB PCB SCANNER RADF PCB CCD
Option
SPEAKER Audio PCL IC2
IC5 AFE
IC8 (*2) OP-550 CCD 600dpi
Gate
System Bus
1Mb-SRAM Lithium battery
IC2 MD0008
Gate
Inverter Lamp
IMAGE
PROCESSING
Gate
Compact IC6 MD0002

Flash Memory
Image
IC2 MD0010 SYSTEM ASIC Memory IC50 MD0008 IC1 FBS
Control ADF Driver. MOTOR
PSU-200E CONTROLER
POWER CODEC RES. CONV

ADF driver PCB
System Bus Controller
(COMM) (COMM)
Image Bus Controller
SUPPLY IC13 READ

256Mb-SDRAM Driver. MOTOR
CODEC
(Image Memory) Senser. FEED
Power (Scanner)
MOTOR
Saved PRINTER
CODEC RES. CONV PCB PRT
UNIT
(Printer) (Smoothing)
Option
PCB LPH
Gate
VIDEO I/F Main

USB 1.1 I/F
LED I/F IC1 MOTOR1
CON LPH control
(*1) Connected to the Ni-MH battery Main

(*2) Connected to the Lithium battery PCB CASSETTE MOTOR2
LED HEAD
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
2-39
Main Control PCB
The main control PCB controls the operations of all machine functions.
The modem modulates and demodulates the data, detects the control signal, and send DTMF signals.
It processes the rotation of the scanned image, fax received image and print image.
It transports the image in memory to the LPH PCB in serial data.
When a Compact Flash Memory Card is inserted to the socket and the machine is turned on, it
transfers the updating data to the SDRAM, and after the transferring writes the data on to the FLASH
memory.
It controls the High Voltage Power Supply.
Memory section:
FLASH MEMORY ��
--- ��
The FLASH MEMORY contains all program instructions for unit operation, the
background level and all other parameters.
SRAM ��
--- ��
The SRAM, which is backed-up by a lithium battery is used to store user programmed
information. When the jumper pin JP2 is removed, the stored information will be cleared.
SDRAM ��
--- ��
The SDRAM is used for buffer the following items. It is backed-up by a Nickel-metal-
hydride battery on the Voice PCB.
• Program data - W
hen the machine is turned on, the CPU operation data on the Flash
memory will be copied to SDRAM, and the program will be executed.
• Program data - Encoded image data
• Program data - Temporary memory for transmission
Note: The SDRAM back-up battery is connected to the Voice PCB. When the Main control PCB
is replaced, the connection will be lost. To remove the Main control PCB without loosing the
backed-up memory, do not remove the harness between Main control PCB and Voice PCB.
Note: When the jumper pin JP2 is removed and reinserted, be sure to clear all the data.
Note: When the harness between the Main control PCB and Voice PCB is removed and reinserted,
execute the DRAM Clear operation. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6> and [Yes].)
Scanner PCB / Scanner RADF PCB

The scanner PCB and scanner RADF PCB detect the sensors on the scanner.
They control the drive motor.
They drive the FBS motor.
They control the CCD.
They offset and adjust the image signal (analog) from the CCD, converts AD, and processes the
image.
ADF PCB / ADF driver PCB

The ADF PCB and ADF driver PCB detect the sensors on the ADF and RADF.
They control the ADF and RADF drive motor.
CCD PCB
The CCD PCB scans the document with 600 dpi CCD, and transfer the image signal (analog) to the
Scanner PCB.
PRT PCB
The PRT PCB detect the sensors in the printer unit.
It controls the clutch.
2-40
LPH PCB
The LPH PCB changes the print serial data on the Main control PCB to a data format for LED-
PrintHead, and transfer the data to the LED-Print-Head.
It reads the LED individual difference correction data, and adjust the print density automatically.
Panel PCB
The Panel PCB controls the LCD.
It scans the keys on the panel and on the LCD.
Voice PCB
The Voice PCB outputs the voice guidance.
The nickel metal hydride battery to back-up the SDRAM of the Main control PCB, is equipped on the
voice PCB.
2-41
2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB
The NCU PCB provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ring
signal detector and telephone control circuit.
IC1
IC2
LINE
OFHK
CI
SDI
SDO
FSYNL
MCLK
24.576MHZ
TEL1
PC4
OH
TEL2
NCU PCB block diagram

Major components of the NCU
IC1: AFE (Analog Front End)

IC1 has the following functions:
• Off Hook (The establishment of DC loop state): It makes the quiescent state from the loop state.
• CI detector: It detects the ringing signal.
• OH detector: It detects the state of On-hook or Off-hook of the external telephone.
IC2
IC2 controls the IC1. It also sets the parameter of the IC1.
H relay
It exchanges the connection for the Tel1 and Tel2 line connection.
Normally, it is connected to the line, makes AC loop and detects Off-hook by line current.
When it is connected to the private line, the line current is not available but it is supplied private cur-
rent from the MFP.
CI detector
Detects the calling signal.
OH detector
Detects the hook condition of the second telephone unit. Normally, IC1 detects the hook condition.
When the second telephone is connected to the private line, PC4 detects the hook condition.
2-42
2.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPS)
The power supple is from 220 VAC to 240 VAC.
The power supply unit receives the input line voltage and currents it to output voltage of +5 VDC, +24
VDC and +3.3 VDC.
+24 VDC is controlled by transformer, + 5 VDC and + 3.3 VDC is controlled by DC/DC converter.
It consists of the primary controller, secondary controller, heater controller and flicker controller.
The AC input is switched between INLET and AC SW.
An overvoltage and overcurrent preventing circuit is equipped.
A driver circuit for the heat roller is quipped.
The output range is from 750 W / 220 VAC to 750 W / 240 VCA.
INLET SW INPUT AC CN1 OUTPUT CN2
L FUSE +24.0V
RECTIFICATION/ RECTIFICATION/
CN1 LINE FILTER 3
LEVEL LEVEL
N 4
5
6
CONTROL
+24V
HEATER
CONTROL 1
+5.0V
CONTROL
CONTROL IC 11
DC/DC +㧡㨂
12
HEATER
CONTROL 2
㧯㧺㧝01 PC1A
CONTROL +3.3V
DC/DC +㧟㨂 13
14
OUTPUT HEATER CN101
PGND 7
PC2A 8
9
10
SGND 15
16
PT102
HC2
2
PT101
HC1
1
DB2 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
2-43
2.8 High Voltage Power Supply
This PCB makes and supply high voltage for every electrophotographic process (charging, grid,
developing, transferring).
To charge the drum surface negatively, the charge section generates negative-voltage and impresses
the comb electrode.
To charge the drum surface evenly, the grid mesh at the opening of the charge section generates
negative-voltage and impresses the grid electrode. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.
To transfer the toner in the developing unit to the drum, the developing unit generates negative-charge
and impresses the mag-roller. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.
To transfer the image on the drum to the paper, the transfer unit generates positive-voltage and
impresses the transfer roller. By cleaning the transfer roller, negative-voltage is generated and
impressed to the roller. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.
+24V Charge(-)
Control Signal G rid(-)
PCB
HVPS
D eveloper(-)
Analog Signal
Transfer (+)
Transfer (-)
DB2 PCB High Voltage Power Supply
2-44
3 Adjustment Procedures
3.1 Field Service Program Modes
The machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed below along
with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description.
Note: When you press “ * ”, you will hear short beeps. However continue the operation, as there is no
problem.
Set or Clear Machine Parameters.................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>
Used to set or clear machine parameters.
Set or Clear Memory Switches......................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <1>
Used to set or clear memory switches.
Clear Programmed Data / User Settings......................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>
��
Erases user-programmed information (date, time, TTI, address ��
book��
, etc.) and any docu-
ments stored in memory.
All RAM Clear..................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <3>
��
Erases same information as “Clear Programmed Data / User Settings” function along with
resetting all of the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
Set or Clear Unique Switches........................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <4>
Used to set or clear Unique switches.
T.30 Monitor....................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <5>
Used to print a G3 procedural summary of the fax communication.
Printer maintenance.......................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>
A��
ccess this mode to determine the cause of the��
“ Call Service” error message.
��
Or, w��
hen replaced the Fuser unit or Image ��
t��
ransfer roller��
, reset the counter using this mode.
Monitor Speaker................................................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <8>
Use to hear the signal sound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction.
Test Modes......................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>
Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests.
Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switches and
Unique Switches List........................................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>
Prints a list of the machine switch settings showing the default settings and current settings.
Factory Functions ............................................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>
Line Test�s. ......................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>
��
Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode......................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4>
Perform it before installing the fax machine.
Set or clear the consumable order sheet........................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>
Used to set or clear the consumable order sheet.
DRAM Clear........................................................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6>
Used to clear a DRAM.
Clear Life Monitor.............................................................................................. <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <7>
Used to clear a Life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, etc.
Clear option module’s SRAM........................................................................... <Menu>��,� <*>, <1>, <8>
Used to clear a SRAM of option module.
Set Service Code............................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <9>
Used to protect to clear a Life monitor.
Life Monitor Maintenance................................................................................. <Menu>, <*>, <2>��
��
, <0>
When the main PCB has been replaced, you should register the previous several counter
values of the life monitor.
Sensor Input test .............................................................................................. <Menu>, <*>, <2>��
��
, ��
<2>
Sensor diagnostic test.
3-1
Printer diagnostic mode................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <2>��
��
, <3>
Printer diagnostic test.
Network service��
m��
��
ode ..................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <2>��
��
, <4>
Used to display the server
��
sumcheck, export/import the network setting data or to initialize
the network settings.
Flash ROM Sum check...................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <2>��
��
, <9>
Used to confirm flash ROM Check Sum after the software is overwritten.
Service Report setting...................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <4>��
, <2>
Used to enter location where to send the service report.
Printer registration��
��
adjustment........................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <4>��
, <3>
Used to adjust
��
the printer registration.
��
Printer trouble reset.......................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <4>��
, ��
<5>
Used to delete
��
the error message on the LCD.
Cleaning mode................................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <4>��
, ��
<6>
Used to rotate the feed roller and registration roller for cleaning.
Voice test............................................................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <4>��
, ��
<7>
Used to test
��
the voice guidance.
Set or Clear Network Switches......................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <1>
Used to set or clear Network switches.
Security function maintenance........................................................................ <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <2>
��
Used to edit the security function regardless of the registered protect passcode.
Black ratio measuring....................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <4>
Used to measure the black ratio of any document.
Service function menu...................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <7>, <7>
Displays all the available field service program modes’ shortcuts.
Update the software.......................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <6>
Used to upgrade the software using the CF (Compact Flash) card.
Quick installation mode.................................................................................... <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <9>
You can set the initial setting mode, consumable order sheet setting and service report
setting continuously.setting continuously.
3-2
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment
3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery
maintains these settings if power is lost.
1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>.

2. Select “Edit Parameters.” and press [Enter].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing < > or < >, or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Press [Enter].
5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings:

• The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).
• Press < > or < > of the cursor key to move the cursor.
• Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or < > or < >, to change the bit value.
• Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine pa-
rameter edit screen.
• Press [Close] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter.
6. If you want to set other machine parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.
Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List.
The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters

Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults.
2. Select “Clear Parameters” and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the parameters, press [No].
4. Press <Reset>
��
to
��
return the machine to standby.
3-3
Machine Parameter 000 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 001

Switch Initial Usage/Comments
Adjust
Setting
7 0 Factory use only
3 0 Output attenuation See table below
2 0 Note: The setting of this switch is available only
1 0 when setting other than 0 dB (and this setting is
0 0 used instead o f Memory Switch 011, bit 3-0.)
Machine Parameter 001—Output attenuation

Switch -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -0
dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Machine Parameter 002 ~ 006 — Factory use only

Switch Initial
Adjust Usage/Comments
Setting
7 0 Not used
6 0 Not used
5 0 Not used
4 0 Not used
3 0 Not used
2 0 DRAM capacity indication This switch indicates the DRAM capacity.
o��
n ��
the ��
Expansion Memory (This switch is read only, do not set any character)
PCB You can see the memory capacity by how many “1”
1 1 DRAM capacity indication is indicated on the LCD. One “1” means 32 MB.
o��
n ��
the ��
Expansion Memory For example, if two “1” are indicated, i.e. “011”, the
PCB DRAM capacity is 32 MB x�� =
2 �� 64
��
MB.
0 1 DRAM capacity indication
o��
n ��
the ��
Main PCB
Machine Parameter 008 and 009 — Factory use only
3-4
Switch Initial
Setting
7 0 ADF scanner registration Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 adjustment (Horizontal)
5 0 +25 steps 00011001 +5.290 mm
4 0 Copy mode :
+20 steps 00010100 +4.232 mm
3 1
Adjusts the start point to :
2 1 scan the document. +10 steps 00001010 +2.116 mm
1 1 The plus setting increases :
0 1 the left margin and the minus 00000000 0 mm
setting decreases it. :
-10 steps 10001010 -2.116 mm
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi :
(0.2116 mm) -20 steps 10010100 -4.232 mm
:
-25 steps 11111101 -5.290 mm
Note:To adjust fax / scan mode, adjust machine

parameter 453.

Initial
Switch Adjust Usage/Comments
Setting
7 0 Adjustment of the scanning Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 stretching and squeezing for
5 0 ADF. 00001111 +1.5 %
4 0 (Horizontal) :
00001000 +0.8 %
3 0
The plus setting stretches the :
2 0 image data and the 00000100 +0.4 %
1 0 minus setting squeezes it. :
0 0 00000010 +0.2 %
Each setting changes by 000000��
0��
1 +0.1 %
0.1% 00000000 0 %  Initial setting
��
1��
00000��
0��
1 -0.1 %
��
1��
0000010 -0.2 %
:
10000100 -0.4 %
:
10001000 -0.8 %
:
10001111 -1.5 %
3-5
Initial
Setting
6 0 stretching and squeezing for 00111111 +6.3 %
5 0 ADF. :
4 0 (Vertical) 00011111 +3.2 %
:
3 0
Fax/Scan mode 00001111 +1.5 %
2 1 :
1 0 The plus setting squeezes 00001000 +0.8 %
0 1 the image data and the :
minus setting stretches it. 000000��
0��
1 +0.1 %
00000000 0 %  Standard
Each setting changes by ��
1��
0000��
00��
1 ��
-��
0.��
1��
%
0.1% :
10001000 -0.8 %
:
10001111 -1.5 %
:
10011111 -3.2 %
:
10111111 -6.3 %
For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 430.

Initial
Setting
7 1 Leading edge document Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 margin adjustment (ADF)
5 0 63 steps 00111111 +10.67 mm
4 0 Adjusts the leading edge :
margin from Document 00100000 +5.41 mm
3 1
Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start :
2 0 of scanning the position. 00010000 +2.71 mm
1 0 :
0 0 00001000 +1.35 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi :
(0.0847 x 2 mm) 00000000 27.8 mm
:
10001000 -1.35 mm
:
10010000 -2.71 mm
:
10100000 -5.41 mm
:
-63step 101111111 -10.67 mm
Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use

aditional parameters.
Mode Resolution Adding Machine Parameter

Copy mode — 431
Fax mode Normal 086
Fine 087
Super fine / Hyper fine 088
Ultra fine 089
3-6
Initial
Setting
7 1 Trailing edge document Switch 76543210 Settings
5 1 63 steps 00111111 +10.67 mm
4 1 Adjusts document feed after :
the trailing edge of a docu- 00100000 +5.41 mm
3 0
ment passes Document :
2 1 Sensor 2 (DS2). 00010000 +2.71 mm
1 0 :
0 1 00001000 +1.35 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi :
(0.0847 x 2 mm) 00000000 27.8 mm
:
10001000 -1.35 mm
:
10010000 -2.71 mm
:
10100000 -5.41 mm
:
-63step 101111111 -10.67 mm


Copy mode — 432
Fax mode Normal 076
Fine 077
Ultra fine 079
3-7
Initial
Setting
7 0 FBS scanner registration Switch 76543210 Settings
5 0 25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm
4 0 Copy mode :
00010000 +3.39 mm
3 1
2 0 scan the document. 00001000 +1.69 mm
10001000 -1.69 mm
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi :
(0.2116 mm) 10010000 -3.39 mm
:
-25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm
Note: For adjust fax / scan mode, adjust machine

parameter 454.

Initial
Setting
5 0 FBS�. 00001111 +1.5 %
4 0 (Horizontal) :
00001000 +0.8 %
3 0
The plus setting stretches :
2 0 the image data and the 00000100 +0.4 %
0 0 00000010 +0.2 %
0��
1 +0.1 %
��
1��
00000��
0��
1 -0.1 %
��
1��
0000010 -0.2 %
:
10000100 -0.4 %
:
10001000 -0.8 %
:
10001111 -1.5 %
3-8
Initial
Setting
5 0 FBS. 00001111 +1.5 %
4 0 (Vertical) :
00001000 +0.8 %
3 0
Copy mode :
0 0 minus setting stretches it. 00000010 +0.2 %
000000��
0��
1 +0.1 %
Each setting changes by 00000000 0 %  Initial setting
0.1% ��
1��
00000��
0��
1 -0.1 %
��
1��
0000010 -0.2 %
:
10000100 -0.4 %
:
10001000 -0.8 %
:
10001111 -1.5 %
For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 435.

Initial
Setting
6 0 margin adjustment f��
or FBS
��
5 0 3��
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm
4 0 ADF model :
16��
steps 00��
0��
10000 +2.25 mm
3 0
Copy and Scan mode :
2 0 8��
steps 00��
00��
1000 +1.13 mm
0 1 margin after Home Sensor 4��
steps 00��
00��
0100 +0.56 mm
OFF to the start of scanning :
the position. 00000000 5 mm
:
Each setting changes -4��
steps ��
1��
000��
0100��
��
-��
0.56mm
by 0.140793616��
mm.
�� :
-8��
steps ��
1��
000��
1��
0��
00��
��
-��
1.13mm
:
-16��
steps ��
1��
00��
1��
00��
00��
��
-2.25 mm
��
:
-3��
1 steps ��
1��
0100000 ��
-4.36 mm
��
For copy mode, add the value of machine parameter

436.
For fax mode, adjust machine parameter 455.
Note: F
or RADF model, adjust it using the machine
parameter 457.
3-9
Initial
Setting
7 0 Mirror carriage standby Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 position adjustment
5 0 63 steps 00111111 +8.87 mm
4 0 Adjusts the number of the :
steps from the home sensor 60 steps 00111100 +8.45 mm
3 1
of the mirror carriage OFF :
2 1 to the standby position. 50 steps 00110010 +7.04 mm
1 0 :
0 0 1 step = 0.140793616 mm 30 steps 00010100 +2.82 mm
:
10 steps 00001010 +1.41 mm
:
3 steps 00000011 +0.42 mm
2 steps 00000010 +0.28 mm
1 step 00000001 +0.14 mm
00000000 20 mm
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,

“10000001” means “-0.1��
4��
mm”.

Initial
Setting
7 1 Mirror carriage transfer mode Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 position adjustment
5 0 63 steps 00111111 +8.87 mm
4 0 Adjusts the number of the :
steps from the home sensor 60 steps 00111100 +8.45 mm
3 1
of the mirror carriage OFF :
2 1 to the transfer mode position. 50 steps 00110010 +7.04 mm
1 1 :
0 1 1 step = 0.140793616 mm 30 steps 00010100 +2.82 mm
:
10 steps 00001010 +1.41 mm
:
3 steps 00000011 +0.42 mm
2 steps 00000010 +0.28 mm
1 step 00000001 +0.14 mm
00000000 20 mm

“10000001” means “-0.1��
4��
mm”.
3-10
Initial
Setting
7 0 Scanning density Switch 76543210
6 0 level adjustment in normal 01111111 Darkest setting
5 0 resolution. :
4 0 00001000
:
3 0
00000000  Initial setting
2 0 :
1 0 10001000
0 0 :
11111111 Lightest setting

Initial
Setting
7 0 Scanning density level Switch 76543210
6 0 adjustment in fine resolution. 01111111 Darkest setting
5 0 :
4 0 00001000
:
3 0
2 0 :
1 0 10001000
0 0 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment in super-fine 01111111 Darkest setting
5 0 resolution. :
4 0 00001000
:
3 0
2 0 :
1 0 10001000
0 0 :
3-11
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment in hyper-fine 01111111 Darkest setting
5 0 resolution. :
4 0 00001000
:
3 0
2 0 :
1 0 10001000
0 0 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment in ultra-fine 01111111 Darkest setting
5 0 (600dpi x��
600dpi)
��
resolution. :
4 0 00001000
:
3 0
2 0 :
1 0 10001000
0 0 :

Initial
Setting
6 1 adjustment in background 01111111 Darkest setting
5 0 mode. :
4 0 00001000
:
3 0
00000000
2 0 :
1 0 10001000
0 0 :
:
3-12

Initial
Setting
5 0 Left side edge document Adjust this parameter when black line appears on
4 0 margin adjustment the left edge of the printouts in following cases:
3 0 • While paper selection is set to “Auto”, A4 or B4
2 1 Each setting changes by paper is selected in rotate printing
0.4233 mm. • The document set on the FBS is A5 or B5 , or
1 0
the vertical length of the document is shorter than
0 1 Left side means the side of A5 or B5 .
the scanning position.
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings
1 1 1 1 1 1 26.67 mm
:
1 1 1 1 0 0 25.40 mm
:
1 1 0 0 1 0 21.17 mm
:
1 0 1 0 0 0 16.93 mm
:
0 1 1 1 1 0 12.70 mm
:
0 1 0 1 0 1 8.47 mm
:
0 0 0 1 0 1 2.11 mm (Initial setting)
:
0 0 0 0 0 1 0.42 mm
0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 mm
3-13
Initial
Setting
5 0 31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm
4 0 ADF model :
Fax mode 00010000 +2.71 mm
3 1
Normal Resolution :
2 0 00001000 +1.35 mm
0 1 the trailing edge of a docu- 00000000 27.8 mm
Sensor 2 (DS2). 10001000 -1.35 mm
:
10010000 -2.71 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi :
(0.0847 x 2 mm) -31step 100011111 -5.25 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter014,

when adjusting the steps for transmission
with normal resolution.

Initial
Setting
5 0 31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm
4 0 ADF model :
Fax mode 00010000 +2.71 mm
3 0
Fine Resolution :
2 0 00001000 +1.35 mm
Sensor 2 (DS2). 10001000 -1.35 mm
:
10010000 -2.71 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi :
(0.0847 x 2 mm) -31step 100011111 -5.25 mm

with fine resolution.
3-14
Initial
Setting
5 0 31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm
4 0 ADF model :
Fax mode 00010000 +2.71 mm
3 0
Super-fine Resolution :
2 0 Hyper-fine Resolution 00001000 +1.35 mm
1 1 :
0 0 Adjusts document feed after 00000000 27.8 mm
the trailing edge of a docu- :
ment passes Document 10001000 -1.35 mm
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
10010000 -2.71 mm
:
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi -31step 100011111 -5.25 mm
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
with super/hyper -fine resolution.

Initial
Setting
5 0 31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm
4 0 ADF model :
Fax mode 00010000 +2.71 mm
3 0
Ultra-fine Resolution :
2 0 00001000 +1.35 mm
Sensor 2 (DS2). 10001000 -1.35 mm
:
10010000 -2.71 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi :
(0.0847 x 2 mm) -31step 100011111 -5.25 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 014,

with ultra-fine resolution.
3-15

Initial
Setting
5 0 63 steps 00111111 +10.67 mm
3 0
1 1 :
0 1 ADF model 00001000 +1.35 mm
Fax mode :
Document type: Normal 00000000 27.8 mm
:
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi 10001000 -1.35 mm
(0.0847 x 2 mm) :
10010000 -2.71 mm
:
10100000 -5.41 mm
:
-63step 101111111 -10.67 mm


Initial
Setting
5 0 63 steps 00111111 +10.67 mm
3 0
1 1 :
0 1 ADF model 00001000 +1.35 mm
Fax mode :
Document type: Fine 00000000 27.8 mm
:
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi 10001000 -1.35 mm
(0.0847 x 2 mm) :
10010000 -2.71 mm
:
10100000 -5.41 mm
:
-63step 101111111 -10.67 mm

when adjusting the steps for fax mode / fine
scanning.
3-16
Initial
Setting
5 0 63 steps 00111111 +10.67 mm
3 0
1 1 :
0 1 ADF model 00001000 +1.35 mm
Fax mode :
Document type: Super Fine / 00000000 27.8 mm
Hyper Fine :
10001000 -1.35 mm
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi :
(0.0847 x 2 mm) 10010000 -2.71 mm
:
10100000 -5.41 mm
:
-63step 101111111 -10.67 mm

when adjusting the steps for fax mode /
super/ hyper-fine or hyper-fine scanning.

Initial
Setting
5 0 63 steps 00111111 +10.67 mm
3 0
1 1 :
0 0 ADF model 00001000 +1.35 mm
Fax mode :
Document type: Ultra Fine 00000000 27.8 mm
(600 dpi) :
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi 10001000 -1.35 mm
(0.0847 x 2 mm) :
10010000 -2.71 mm
:
10100000 -5.41 mm
:
-63step 101111111 -10.67 mm

when adjusting the steps for fax mode / ultra-
fine (600dpi) scanning.
3-17
Initial
Setting
7 0 Printer registration Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 adjustment (Horizontal) at
5 0 the 1st cassette for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
0 0 The plus setting increases 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
the left margin and the minus :
setting decreases it. 00000000 0 mm
:
The setting
��
changes by -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
Parameter 110 for the
rotate printing.
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0
mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting
this switch, set the margin to the initial
setting in Unique Switch 52.

Initial
Setting
7 0 Printer registration adjust- Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 ment (Horizontal) at
5 0 the 2nd cassette for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.
3-18
Initial
Setting
5 0 the 3rd cassette for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.

Initial
Setting
5 0 the 4th cassette for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.
3-19
Initial
Setting
5 1 the Bypass tray for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 1 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
print.
1 0 :
0 1 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
The plus setting increases
00000000 0 mm
setting decreases it.
:
-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
The setting
��
changes by
:
0.1mm.
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine -127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.

Initial
Setting
5 1 the duplex printing for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 1 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
print.
1 0 :
0 1 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
00000000 0 mm
:
-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
The setting
��
changes by
:
0.1mm.
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

3-20
Initial
Setting
5 0 the 1st cassette for rotate 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.

Initial
Setting
5 0 the 2nd cassette for rotatel 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.
3-21
Initial
Setting
5 0 the 3rd cassette for rotate 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.

Initial
Setting
5 0 the 4th cassette for rotate 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.
3-22
Initial
Setting
5 1 the Bypass tray for rotate 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 1 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
print.
1 0 :
0 1 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
00000000 0 mm
:
-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
The setting
��
changes by
:
0.1mm.
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
normal printing.
3-23
Initial
Setting
5 0 the 1st cassette for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
Adjusts the ending point to :
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.

Initial
Setting
5 0 the 2nd cassette for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.
3-24
Initial
Setting
5 0 the 3rd cassette for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.

Initial
Setting
5 0 the 4th cassette for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.
3-25
Initial
Setting
5 1 the Bypass tray for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 1 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
print.
1 0 :
0 1 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
00000000 0 mm
:
-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
The setting
��
changes by
:
0.1mm.
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
rotate printing.

Initial
Setting
5 1 the duplex printing for normal 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 1 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
print.
1 0 :
0 1 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
00000000 0 mm
:
-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
The setting
��
changes by
:
0.1mm.
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

3-26
Initial
Setting
5 0 the 1st cassette for rotate 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.

Initial
Setting
5 0 the 2nd cassette for rotatel 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.
3-27
Initial
Setting
5 0 the 3rd cassette for rotate 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.

Initial
Setting
5 0 the 4th cassette for rotate 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
2 0 print. 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 :
:
The setting
��
0.1mm. :
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.
3-28
Initial
Setting
5 1 the Bypass tray for rotate 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 1 printing. :
32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
print.
1 0 :
0 1 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
00000000 0 mm
:
-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
The setting
��
changes by
:
0.1mm.
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
normal printing.
3-29
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 Adjusts the left margin at the :
1st cassette for normal print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
0 0 the left margin and the minus 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1 mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.


Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
2nd cassette for normal print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by 1 :
mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.

3-30
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
3rd cassette for normal print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by 1 :
mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.


Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4th cassette for normal print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by 1 :
mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.

3-31
Initial
Setting
6 1 adjustment.
5 1 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
Bypass tray for normal print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
16 dots (0.6773 mm). -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
rotate printing.

3-32
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
1st cassette for rotate print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1 mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.


Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
2nd cassette for rotate print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by 1 :
mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.

3-33
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
3rd cassette for rotate print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by 1 :
mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.


Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4th cassette for rotate print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by 1 :
mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.

3-34
Initial
Setting
6 1 adjustment.
5 1 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
Bypass tray for rotate print- 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
ing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
16 dots (0.6773 mm). -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
Note: See Machine
:
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm
normal printing.

3-35
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
4 0 Adjusts the right margin at :
the 1st cassette for normal 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
1 0 The plus setting decreases :
0 0 the right margin and the 8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm
minus setting increases it. :
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
rotate printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the 2nd cassette for normal 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
rotate printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

3-36
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the 3rd cassette for normal 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
rotate printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the 4th cassette for normal 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
rotate printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

3-37
Initial
Setting
6 1 adjustment.
5 1 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the Bypass tray for normal 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
rotate printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

3-38
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the 1st cassette for rotate 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
normal printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the 2nd cassette for rotate 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
normal printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

3-39
Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the 3rd cassette for rotate 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
normal printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


Initial
Setting
6 0 adjustment.
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the 4th cassette for rotate 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 0
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
normal printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

3-40
Initial
Setting
6 1 adjustment.
5 1 127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm
the Bypass tray for rotate 32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm
3 1
printing. :
2 0 16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm
00000000 0 mm
The setting
��
changes by :
1mm. -8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm
:
Note: See Machine
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
normal printing.
-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

3-41
Switch Initial
Setting
7 0 RADF scanner registration Switch 76543210 Settings
5 0 +25 steps 00011001 +5.290 mm
4 0 Copy mode :
+20 steps 00010100 +4.232 mm
3 0
2 0 scan the document. +10 steps 00001010 +2.116 mm
-10 steps 10001010 -2.116 mm
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi :
(0.2116 mm) -20 steps 10010100 -4.232 mm
:
-25 steps 11111101 -5.290 mm
Note: To adjust ADF model, use machine

parameter 010.

Initial
Setting
5 0 RADF. 00001111 +1.5 %
4 0 (Horizontal) :
00001000 +0.8 %
3 0
The plus setting stretches the :
2 0 image data and the 00000100 +0.4 %
0 0 00000010 +0.2 %
0��
1 +0.1 %
��
1��
00000��
0��
1 -0.1 %
��
1��
0000010 -0.2 %
:
10000100 -0.4 %
:
10001000 -0.8 %
:
10001111 -1.5 %

parameter 011.
3-42
Initial
Setting
5 0 RADF. :
4 0 (Vertical) 00011111 +3.2 %
:
3 1
Fax/Scan mode 00001111 +1.5 %
2 0 :
minus setting stretches it. 000000��
0��
1 +0.1 %
00000000 0 %  Standard
Each setting changes by ��
1��
0000��
00��
1 ��
-��
0.��
1��
%
0.1% :
10001000 -0.8 %
:
10001111 -1.5 %
:
10011111 -3.2 %
:
10111111 -6.3 %

parameter 012.
3-43
Initial
Setting
6 0 margin adjustment
5 1 127 steps 01111111 +7.86 mm
margin from Document 64 steps 00100000 +4.0 mm
3 0
2 1 of scanning the position. 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
1 0 :
0 1 RADF model Front page 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm 00000000 0
:
-16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-64 steps 10100000 -4.0 mm
:
-127 steps 11111111 -7.86 mm
Note: To adjust ADF model��

, ��
use machine
parameter 013.
Note: To adjust RADF model back page��
, ��
use
machine parameter 398.


Copy mode — 386
Fax mode Normal 394
Fine 395
Ultra fine 397
3-44
Initial
Setting
6 0 margin adjustment
5 1 127 steps 01111111 +7.86 mm
the trailing edge of a docu- 64 steps 00100000 +4.0 mm
3 1
2 0 Sensor 2 (DS2). 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
1 0 :
0 0 (RADF model Front page) 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm 00000000 0
:
-16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-64 steps 10100000 -4.0 mm
:
-127 steps 11111111 -7.86 mm

, ��
use machine
parameter 014.
, ��
use


Copy mode — 387
Fax mode Normal 390
Fine 391
Ultra fine 393
3-45
Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjustment of the scanner Switch 76543210 Settings
5 0 RADF. 00111111 +6.3 %
4 0 (Vertical) :
00101000 +4.0 %
3 0
Copy mode :
0 0 minus setting stretches it. 00000000 0 %  Standard
:
Each setting changes by 10010100 -2.0 %
0.1% :
10101000 -4.0 %
:
10111111 -6.3 %
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 383.

Initial
Setting
6 0 margin adjustment 63 steps 00111111 +3.9 mm
5 0 :
4 0 Adjusts the leading edge 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
margin from Document :
3 0
Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 of scanning the position. :
1 0 00000000 0
0 0 RADF model Front page :
Copy mode -16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

when adjusting the steps for copy mode.
Note: Adjust the steps in 600 dpi copy.
3-46
Initial
Setting
5 0 :
4 0 Adjusts document feed after 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
3 0
ment passes Document 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 Sensor 2 (DS2). :
1 0 00000000 0
0 0 RADF model Front page :
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

3-47
Initial
Setting
7 0 Document skew adjustment This sets the flexible volume at the separator roller.
6 0 If the flexible volume is high, the document skew
RADF model (Front Page)
5 0 will improve but thin paper may easy jam.
4 0
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 76543210 Settings
3 0
127 steps 01111111 +7.86 mm
2 0 :
1 0 64 steps 00100000 +4.0 mm
0 0 :
32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
:
16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
:
00000000 0
:
-16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-64 steps 10100000 -4.0 mm
:
-127 steps 11111111 -7.86 mm
Note: F
or ADF model, adjust it using the machine
parameter 452.

Initial
Setting
R��
ADF model (Back Page)
4 0
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm Switch 76543210 Settings
3 0
127 steps 01111111 +7.86 mm
2 0 :
1 0 64 steps 00100000 +4.0 mm
0 0 :
32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
:
16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
:
00000000 0
:
-16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-64 steps 10100000 -4.0 mm
:
-127 steps 11111111 -7.86 mm
Note: F
parameter 452.
3-48
Initial
Setting
5 1 :
4 0 RADF model (Front page) 32 steps 00010000 +1.9 mm
Fax mode :
3 0
Normal Resolution 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 :
1 1 Adjusts document feed after 00000000 0
0 0 the trailing edge of a docu- :
ment passes Document -16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
-32 steps 10010000 -1.9 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm


Initial
Setting
5 0 :
Fax mode :
3 1
Fine Resolution 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 :
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
-32 steps 10010000 -1.9 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

3-49
Initial
Setting
5 0 :
Fax mode :
3 0
Super-fine Resolution 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 Hyper-fine Resolution :
1 0 00000000 0
the trailing edge of a docu- -16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
Sensor 2 (DS2). -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm
with super/hyper fine resolution.

Initial
Setting
5 0 :
Fax mode :
3 0
Ultra-fine Resolution 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 :
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

3-50
Initial
Setting
4 0 margin from Document 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
3 1
of scanning the position. 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 1 :
1 0 RADF model (Front page) 00000000 0
0 1 Fax mode :
Document type: Normal -16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

Initial
Setting
6 0 margin adjustment (ADF) 63 steps 00111111 +3.9 mm
5 0 :
3 0
1 1 00000000 0
0 0 RADF model (Front page) :
Fax mode -16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
Document type: Fine :
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm :
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

3-51
Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 0
1 0 00000000 0
Document type: Super Fine / :
Hyper Fine -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

with super/hyber fine resolution.

Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 0
1 0 00000000 0
Document type: Ultra Fine :
(600 dpi) -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

with ultra fine resolution.
3-52
Initial
Setting
5 1 (RADF model Back page) :
4 0 64 steps 00100000 +4.0 mm
Adjusts the leading edge :
3 0
margin from Document 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
2 1 Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start :
1 0 of scanning the position. 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
0 1 :
00000000 0
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm :
-16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-64 steps 10100000 -4.0 mm
:
-127 steps 11111111 -7.86 mm

, ��
use machine
parameter 013.
Note: To adjust RADF model front page��
, ��
use


Copy mode — 410
Fax mode Normal 416
Fine 417
Ultra fine 419
3-53
Initial
Setting
5 1 (RADF model Back page) :
4 1 64 steps 00100000 +4.0 mm
Adjusts document feed after :
3 0
the trailing edge of a docu- 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
2 0 ment passes Document :
1 1 Sensor 2 (DS2). 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
0 0 :
00000000 0
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm :
-16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-64 steps 10100000 -4.0 mm
:
-127 steps 11111111 -7.86 mm

, ��
use machine
parameter 014.
, ��
use


Copy mode — 411
Fax mode Normal 412
Fine 413
Ultra fine 415
3-54
Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 0
1 0 00000000 0
0 0 RADF model Back��
��
page :
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm


Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 0
2 0 Sensor 2 (DS2). :
1 0 00000000 0
0 0 RADF model Back page :
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

3-55
Initial
Setting
5 1 :
4 0 RADF model (Back page) 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
Fax mode :
3 0
Normal Resolution 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 :
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm


Initial
Setting
5 0 :
Fax mode :
3 1
Fine Resolution 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 :
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

3-56
Initial
Setting
5 0 :
Fax mode :
3 1
Super-fine Resolution 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 Hyper-fine Resolution :
1 0 00000000 0
the trailing edge of a docu- -16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
Sensor 2 (DS2). -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm
with super/hyper fine resolution.

Initial
Setting
5 0 :
Fax mode :
3 0
Ultra-fine Resolution 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 0 :
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

3-57
Initial
Setting
4 0 margin from Document 32 steps 00010000 +2.0 mm
3 1
of scanning the position. 16 steps 00001000 +1.0 mm
2 1 :
1 0 RADF model (Back page) 00000000 0
0 1 Fax mode :
Document type: Normal -16 steps 10001000 -1.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm


Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 1
1 0 00000000 0
0 0 RADF model (Back page) :
Document type: Fine :
-32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm :
-63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

3-58
Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 0
1 0 00000000 0
Document type: Super Fine / :
Hyper Fine -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

with super/hyber fine resolution.

Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 0
1 0 00000000 0
Document type: Ultra Fine :
(600 dpi) -32 steps 10010000 -2.0 mm
:
1 step = 0.03093 x 2 mm -63 steps 10111111 -3.9 mm

with ultra fine resolution.
3-59
Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjustment of the scanner Switch 76543210 Settings
5 0 ADF. :
4 0 (Vertical) 00011111 +3.1 %
:
3 0
Copy mode 00001111 +1.5 %
2 0 The plus setting squeezes :
1 0 the image data and the 00001000 +0.8 %
0 0 minus setting stretches it. :
000000��
0��
1 +0.1 %
Each setting changes by 00000000 0 %  Standard
0.1% ��
1��
0000��
00��
1 ��
-��
0.��
1��
%
:
10001000 -0.8 %
:
10001111 -1.5 %
:
10011111 -3.1 %
:
10111111 -6.3 %
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 383.
For fax and scan mode, adjust machine parameter

012.�.
3-60
Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 0
1 0 30 steps 00011110 +5.08 mm
0 0 ADF model :
Copy mode 20 steps 00010100 +3.38 mm
:
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi 10 steps 00001010 +1.69 mm
(0.0847 x 2 mm) :
00000000
:
-10 steps 10001010 -1.69 mm
:
-20 steps 10010100 -3.38 mm
:
-30 steps 10011110 -5.08 mm
:
-50 steps 10110010 -8.47 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -10.76 mm

3-61
Initial
Setting
5 0 :
3 0
2 1 Sensor 2 (DS2). :
1 0 30 steps 00011110 +5.08 mm
0 0 ADF model :
Copy mode 20 steps 00010100 +3.38 mm
:
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi 10 steps 00001010 +1.69 mm
(0.0847 x 2 mm) :
00000000
:
-10 steps 10001010 -1.69 mm
:
-20 steps 10010100 -3.38 mm
:
-30 steps 10011110 -5.08 mm
:
-50 steps 10110010 -8.47 mm
:
-63 steps 10111111 -10.76 mm
Note: These steps are added to the steps set in

3-62
Initial
Setting
5 0 FBS. 00001111 +1.5 %
4 0 (Vertical) :
00001000 +0.8 %
3 0
Copy mode :
0 0 minus setting stretches it. 00000010 +0.2 %
000000��
0��
1 +0.1 %
Each setting changes by 00000000 0 %  Initial setting
0.1% ��
1��
00000��
0��
1 -0.1 %
��
1��
0000010 -0.2 %
:
10000100 -0.4 %
:
10001000 -0.8 %
:
10001111 -1.5 %
For fax and scan mode, adjust machine parameter

017.

Initial
Setting
6 0 margin adjustment F��
or FBS
��
5 0 3��
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm
4 0 ADF model :
16��
steps 00��
0��
10000 +2.25 mm
3 0
Copy and Scann mode :
2 0 Adjusts the leading edge 8��
steps 00��
00��
1000 +1.13 mm
1 0 margin after Home Sensor :
0 0 OFF to the start of scanning 4��
steps 00��
00��
0100 +0.56 mm
the position. :
00000000 5 mm  Initial setting
Each setting changes :
by 0.140793616��
mm.
�� -4��
steps ��
1��
000��
0100��
��
-��
0.56mm
:
-8��
steps ��
1��
000��
1��
0��
00��
��
-��
1.13mm
:
-16��
steps ��
1��
00��
1��
00��
00��
��
-2.25 mm
��
:
-3��
1 steps ��
1��
0100000 ��
-4.36 mm
��
Adjust the leading edge document margin for copy

mode add this value to machine parameter 018.
Note: F
parameter 436.
3-63
Machine Parameter 437 and 438
Initial
Setting
7 0 Lamp check times This determines how many times to check the lamp
6 0 before correcting the shading data. When the it is
5 0 cold and lamp error is easy to occur, check the lamp
4 0 more times if it ready.
3 0
The checking time is a total of value of the machine
2 0 parameter 437 value integral multiple with 256 and
1 0 the value of machine parameter 438.
0 0
The initial setting is five times.
3-64
Initial
Setting
ADF model
4 1
1 step = 1 / 300 dpi Switch 76543210 Settings
3 0
(0.0847 mm) 127 steps 01111111 +10.75 mm
2 1 :
1 0 32 steps 00100000 +2.71 mm
0 0 :
16 steps 00010000 +1.35 mm
:
8 steps 00001000 +0.68 mm
:
00000000 0 mm
:
-8 steps 1001000 -0.68 mm
:
-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm
:
-120 steps 11111000 -10.16 mm
Note: F
parameter 388.

Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjusts the start point to scan Adjusts the start point to scan the document using
6 0 the document. the ADF in fax mode.
5 0 The plus setting makes to start the point backward
4 0 Fax mode than the standard point and the minus setting
makes the point forward .
3 1
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi
2 1 (0.2116 mm) Switch 76543210 Settings
1 0 25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm
0 1 :
20 steps 00010100 +4.23 mm
:
10 steps 00001010 +2.12 mm
:
5 steps 00000101 +1.05 mm
:
00000000 0 mm
:
-5 steps 10000101 -1.05 mm
:
-10 steps 10001010 -2.12 mm
:
-20 steps 10010100 -4.23 mm
:
-25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm
Note: For copy mode, adjust machine parameter

010.
3-65
Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjusts the start point to Adjusts the start point to scan the document using
6 0 scan the document. the FBS in fax mode.
5 0 The plus setting makes to start the point backward
4 0 Fax mode than the standard point and the minus setting
makes the point forward .
3 1
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi
2 1 (0.2116 mm) Switch 76543210 Settings
1 1 25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm
0 0 :
20 steps 00010100 +4.23 mm
:
10 steps 00001010 +2.12 mm
:
5 steps 00000101 +1.05 mm
:
00000000 0 mm
:
-5 steps 10000101 -1.05 mm
:
-10 steps 10001010 -2.12 mm
:
-20 steps 10010100 -4.23 mm
:
-25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm
Note: For copy mode, adjust machine parameter

015.

Initial
Setting
or FBS
��
5 0 3��
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm
4 0 ADF mode :
16��
steps 00��
0��
10000 +2.25 mm
3 1
Fax mode :
steps 00��
00��
1000 +1.13 mm
steps 00��
00��
0100 +0.56 mm
the position. :
00000000 5 mm
by 0.140793616��
mm.
�� -4��
steps ��
1��
000��
0100��
��
-��
0.56mm
:
-8��
steps ��
1��
000��
1��
0��
00��
��
-��
1.13mm
:
-16��
steps ��
1��
00��
1��
00��
00��
��
-2.25 mm
��
:
-3��
1 steps ��
1��
0100000 ��
-4.36 mm
��
For copy and scan mode, adjust machine parameter

018.
Note: F
parameter 459.

3-66
Initial
Setting
or FBS
��
5 0 3��
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm
4 0 RADF model :
16��
steps 00��
0��
10000 +2.25 mm
3 0
Copy and Scan mode :
2 0 8��
steps 00��
00��
1000 +1.13 mm
0 1 margin after Home Sensor 4��
steps 00��
00��
0100 +0.56 mm
OFF to the start of scanning :
the position. 00000000 ±0 mm
:
Each setting changes -4��
steps ��
1��
000��
0100��
��
-��
0.56mm
by 0.140793616��
mm.
�� :
-8��
steps ��
1��
000��
1��
0��
00��
��
-��
1.13mm
:
-16��
steps ��
1��
00��
1��
00��
00��
��
-2.25 mm
��
:
-3��
1 steps ��
1��
0100000 ��
-4.36 mm
��
For copy mode, add the value of machine parameter

458.
Note: F
parameter 018.
3-67
Initial
Setting
6 0 margin adjustment F��
or FBS
��
5 0 3��
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm
4 0 RADF model :
16��
steps 00��
0��
10000 +2.25 mm
3 0
Copy mode :
steps 00��
00��
1000 +1.13 mm
steps 00��
00��
0100 +0.56 mm
the position. :
00000000 ±0 mm
by 0.140793616��
mm.
�� -4��
steps ��
1��
000��
0100��
��
-��
0.56mm
:
-8��
steps ��
1��
000��
1��
0��
00��
��
-��
1.13mm
:
-16��
steps ��
1��
00��
1��
00��
00��
��
-2.25 mm
��
:
-3��
1 steps ��
1��
0100000 ��
-4.36 mm
��
Adjust the leading edge document margin for copy

mode add this value to machine parameter 458.
Note: F
parameter 436.

Initial
Setting
or FBS
��
5 0 3��
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm
4 0 RADF model :
16��
steps 00��
0��
10000 +2.25 mm
3 1
Fax mode :
steps 00��
00��
1000 +1.13 mm
steps 00��
00��
0100 +0.56 mm
the position. :
00000000 ±0 mm
by 0.140793616��
mm.
�� -4��
steps ��
1��
000��
0100��
��
-��
0.56mm
:
-8��
steps ��
1��
000��
1��
0��
00��
��
-��
1.13mm
:
-16��
steps ��
1��
00��
1��
00��
00��
��
-2.25 mm
��
:
-3��
1 steps ��
1��
0100000 ��
-4.36 mm
��
For copy and scan mode, adjust machine parameter

457.
3-68
Machine Parameter 463 ~ 492

Initial
Setting
7 White balance adjustment Switch 76543210
6
5 See next page which mode 32 steps 00100000 + Darkest setting
4 to adjust :
16 steps 00010000
3
:
2 8 steps 00001000
1 :
0 4 steps 00000100
:
0 step 00000000  Standard
:
-4 step 10000100
:
-8 step 10001000
:
-16step 10010000
:
-32step 10100000 -Lightest setting
3-69
White balance adjustment
Machine
Mode Document type Resolution Binalize method Contrast
parameter
Copy Text 600 dpi Error diffusion Normal 463
Other than normal 464
Photo/Text Normal 465
Photo Normal 467
Other than normal
Bachground Normal 468
Other than normal
Scan Text 600 dpi Error diffusion Normal 469
Photo Normal 473
Other than normal
Other than normal
Text 300 dpi Normal 475
Photo Normal 479
Other than normal
Other than normal
Text 200 dpi Normal 481
Photo Normal 485
Other than normal
Other than normal
Fax Normal, Fine, Super-, Simlpe binalize All contrasts 487
Hyper-, Ultra-fime
Background All contrasts 488
Grayscale 200 dpi Error diffusion Normal 489
Other than normal
400 dpi Normal 490
Other than normal
600 dpi Normal 491
Other than normal
200 dpi Dither Normal 492
Other than normal
See former page how to adjust the parameter.
3-70
Initial
Setting
7 0 PCL Personality Switch 76543210
6 0
5 0 00000001 PCL (Initial setting)
4 0 00000010 PCL XL
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 1

Initial
Setting
7 0 PCL Orientation Switch 76543210
6 0
5 0 00000000 Portrait (Initial setting)
4 0 00000001 Landscape
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 0

Initial
Setting
7 0 PCL Orientation Switch 76543210
6 0
5 0 00000000 Letter
4 0 00000001 Ledger
00000010 Legal
3 0
00000011 Executive
2 1 00000100 A3
1 0 00000101 A4 (Initial setting)
0 1 00000110 A5
00000111 A6
00001000 F4
00001001 B4 (JIS)
00001010 B5 (JIS)
00001101 Half Letter
00001110 COM10
00010000 DL
00010001 Postcard
00010100 Custom
3-71
Initial
Setting
7 0 PCL Paper source Switch 76543210
6 0
5 0 00000000 Auto (Initial setting)
4 0 00000010 Cassette 1
00000011 Cassette 2
3 0
00000100 Cassette 3
2 0 00000101 Cassette 4
1 0 00000110 Bypass tray
0 0

Initial
Setting
7 0 PCL Default Media Type Switch 76543210
6 0
5 0 00000000 Plain (Initial setting)
4 0 00000001 Thick
00000010 Transparency
3 0
00000011 Envelope/Postcard
2 0
1 0
0 0
3-72
Machine Parameter 508 ~ 509 Default Font Number
Machin parameter 508 Machin parameter 509 Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00010000 00000011 Courier (Initial setting)
00010000 00000101 CG Times
00010000 00000110 Letter Gothic
00010000 00010001 CG Omega
00010000 00010100 Coronet
00010000 00010111 Nw Cent Schlbk
00010000 00011111 IT CA vant Gard
00010000 00101100 Clarendon
00010000 00110100 Univers
00010000 01001000 Antiq Olive
00010000 01100101 Garamond
00010000 11001001 Marigold
00010001 00001010 Albertus
01000000 11011010 Arial
01000001 00101110 Symbol
01000010 00000101 Times New Rmn
01100000 00000011 Courier PS
01100000 00000100 Helvetica
01100000 00001111 Palation
01100000 00101111 ITC Bookman
01100010 00000101 Times
01110000 01010000 Mincho
01110000 01100010 Gothic
11110000 01010000 P. Mincho
11110000 01001101 P. Gothic
01111010 10101010 Winding
10110000 00101011 Zapf Chancery
10110000 00101101 Zapf Dingbats
00001011 00101110 Symbol PC
Note: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-75.
3-73
Machine Parameter 510 ~ 511 Default Symbol
Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00000000 00000100 ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
00000000 00001001 ISO 15: Italian
00000000 00001110 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
00000000 00010011 ISO 11: Swedish
00000000 00010101 ISO 6: ASC ll
00000000 00100101 ISO 4: United Kingdom
00000000 00100110 ISO 69: French
00000000 00100111 ISO 21: German
00000000 00110101 Legal
00000000 01001110 ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
00000000 01011110 ISO 17: Spanish
00000000 10101101 PS Math
00000000 10101110 ISO 8859/5 Latin 5
00000000 10110100 Windows 3.1 Latin 5
00000000 11001010 Microsoft Publishing
00000000 11001110 ISO 8859/6 Latin6
00000000 11101010 Desk Top
00000001 00001101 Math-8
00000001 00010101 Roman-8
00000001 00100101 Windows 3.1 Latin 2
00000001 00101010 PC-1004
00000001 00110100 PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T
00000001 00110101 Windows 3.0 Latin 1
00000001 01001010 Ps Text
00000001 01010101 PC-8 Cord Page 437 (Initial setting)
00000001 01110101 PC-8 D/N, Cord Page 437N
00000001 10001010 Macintosh
00000001 10010101 PC-850 Multilingual
00000001 11001100 HP 4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats
00000001 11110101 PI Font
00000010 00110101 PC-852 Latin 2
00000010 01001110 ISO 8859/1 Latin1
00000010 01101011 Windows 3.1j Latin
00000010 01101100 Windows 3.1 Baltic
00000010 01101101 Symbol
00000010 01110101 Windows 3.1 Latin 1
Note: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-75.
3-74
Invalid combination of font number and symbols
Courier Marigold Mincho Windings Zapf- Zapf SymbolPS
CG Times Albertus GothicP. Chancery Dingbats
LetterGothic Arial MinchoP.
CG Omega Symbol Gothic
Coronet TimesNewRmn
NwCentSchlbk CourierPS
ITCAvantGard Helvetica
Clarendon Palatino
Univers ITCBookman
AntiqOlive Times
Garamond
ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
ISO 15: Italian Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
ISO 11: Swedish Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
ISO 6: ASCII Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
ISO 4: United Kingdom Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
ISO 69: French Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
ISO 21: German Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Legal Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
ISO 17: Spanish Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PSMath Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Microsoft Publishing Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
DeskTop Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Math-8 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Roman-8 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PC-1004 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PS Text Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PC-8 Code Page 437 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Macintosh Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PC-850 Multilingual Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
HP4000 ITC ZapfDingbats Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PI Font Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PC-852 Latin 2 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Windows 3.1j Latin Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Windows 3.1 Baltic Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Symbol Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
PC-775 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
Windings Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid
3-75
Machine Parameter 516 ~ 517 PCL X Resolutuion
Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00000001 00101100 300 dpi
00000010 01011000 600 dpi (Initial setting)
Machine Parameter 518 ~ 519 PCL X Resolutuion

Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00000001 00101100 300 dpi
00000010 01011000 600 dpi (Initial setting)
Machine Parameter 520 ~ 521 PCL Time-out period

Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00000000 00000000 Invalid
00000000 00000001 1 sec
00000000 00000010 2 sec
: : :
00000000 01100100 100 sec
: : :
00000000 11001000 200 sec
: : :
00000001 00101100 300 sec (Initial setting)
: : :
00000001 11110100 500 sec
: : :
00000011 00100000 800 sec
: : :
11111111 111111111 65535 sec
Machine Parameter 522 ~ 523 PCL Print copies

Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00000000 00000000 Invalid
00000000 00000001 1 copy (Initial setting)
00000000 00000010 2 copies
: : :
00000011 11100111 999 copies
3-76
Machine Parameter 524 ~ 525 PCL Time-out period
Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00000000 00000000 Invalid
00000000 00000001 1 sec
00000000 00000010 2 sec
: : :
00000000 00001010 10 sec (Initial setting)
: : :
00000000 01100100 100 sec
: : :
00000000 11001000 200 sec
: : :
00000001 00101100 300 sec
: : :
00000001 11110100 500 sec
: : :
11111111 11111111 65535 sec
3-77
Machine Parameter 532 ~ 533 Characters per inch
Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00000000 00000000 Invalid
: : :
00000000 00000011 Invalid
00000000 00000100 0.4 characters/inch
00000000 00000101 0.5 characters/inch
: : :
00000000 01011010 9.0 characters/inch
: : :
00000000 01100100 10.0 characters/inch (Initial setting)
: : :
00000000 01101110 11.0 characters/inch
: : :
00000011 11100111 99.9 characters/inch
Machine Parameter 536 ~ 537 PCL Size of Characters

Switch 76543210 Switch 76543210
00000000 00000000 Invalid0
00000000 00000001 1 point:
: : :
00000000 01100100 10.0 point
: : :
00000000 01111000 12.0 point (Initial setting)
: : :
0100111 00001101 999.7 point
3-78
Switch Initial
Setting
7 0 PJL Respose (for AS400)
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 0 End-Off-Line Text Wrap
0: Enable
1: Disable

Initial
Setting
7 0 PCL Line per page Switch 76543210
6 0 (1 line/page)
5 0 00000000 60 lines (Letter)(Initial setting)
4 0 00000001 Invalid
:
3 0
00000100 Invalid
2 0 00000101 5 lines
1 0 :
0 0 10000000 128 lines

Initial
Setting
7 0 PCL Main Paper Source Switch 76543210
6 0
5 0 00000000 Cassette 1 (Initial setting)
4 0 00000010 Cassette 1
00000011 Cassette 2
3 0
00000110 Bypass Tray
2 0
1 0
0 0
3-79
Switch Initial
Setting
1 0 Line Terminate Switch 1 0
0 0 0 0 CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF
0 1 CR=CR-LF; LF=LF; FF=FF
1 0 CR=CR; LF=CR-LF; FF=CR-FF
0 0 CR=CR-LF; LF=CR-LF; FF=CR-FF
Machine Parameter 547~ 849 — Factory use only
3-80
Initial
Setting
7 0 Loop adjustment This switch adjust the paper loop at the timing
6 0 roller.
5 0 The more loop it is made, the more square the
4 0 printout becomes. At the same time, thin paper is
easy to jam
3 0
2 0 Switch 6543210
1 0 0000000 80 ms
0 0 0001000 170 ms
0010001 340 ms
0101010 420 ms
0110010 500 ms

“10001000” means “-170 ms”.
Machine Parameter 851~ 859 — Factory use only
3-81
Machine Parameter 860 ~ 879
Initial
Setting
7 0 Transfer current adjustment When the all black printed images are light,
6 0 1 step = 0.5 µA increase the current.
5 0 When the half-tone printed images are light or
4 0 See table below for adjusting when the images drop out in white spots, decrease
paper size and type. the current.
3 0
2 0 Switch 3210
1 0 1111 7.5 µA
0 0 1110 7.0 µA
:
1100 6.0 µA
1010 5.0 µA
:
0110 3.0 µA
:
0100 2.0 µA
:
0010 1.0 µA
0001 0.5 µA
0000 0.0 µA
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - (minus)”. For

example,
“10000100” means “-2.0 µA”.
Adjustment targets
Size Type Plain paper (front) Plain paper (back) Thick paper Emvelops
Machin parameter Machin parameter Machin parameter Machin parameter

148 mm or smaller
860 865 870 875
149 ~ 182 mm 861 866 871 876
183 ~ 216 mm 862 867 872 877
217 ~ 257 mm 863 868 873 878
258 ~ 297 mm 864 869 874 879
3-82
Initial
Setting
3 0 Copy print density Switch 3210
2 0 1001 Darkest setting
1 0 :
0 0 0111
:
:
0011
:
0000 Invalid

Initial
Setting
3 0 Fax received documents print Switch 3210
2 0 density 1001 Darkest setting
1 0 :
0 0 0111
:
:
0011
:
0000 Invalid

Initial
Setting
3 0 PC printout print density Switch 3210
1 0 :
0 0 0111
:
:
0011
:
0000 Invalid
3-83
Initial
Setting
3 0 List printout print density Switch 3210
1 0 :
0 0 0111
:
:
0011
:
0000 Invalid

Initial
Setting
7 0 Fusing temperature Switch 76
6 0 Transparency Sheet 11 180 ˚C
10 175 ˚C
01 170 ˚C
00 165 ˚C  Initial setting
5 0 Fusing temperature Switch

4 0 Envelop 011 205 ˚C
3 0 010 200 ˚C
2 0 Fusing temperature 001 195 ˚C
Postcard 000 190 ˚C  Initial setting
1 0
101 185 ˚C
0 0 110 180 ˚C
111 175 ˚C

Initial
Setting
2 0 Fusing temperature Switch 210
1 0 Plain paper 011 190 ˚C
0 0 010 185 ˚C
001 180 ˚C
000 175 ˚C  Initial setting
101 170 ˚C
110 165 ˚C
111 160 ˚C
3-84
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment
3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches

2. Select “Mem Switch Edit” and press [Enter].
4. Press [Enter].
5. To navigate through the memory switch settings:

• Press [Enter] save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory
switch edit screen.
• Press [Close] not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch.
6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List.
The memory switch List will be printed by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches

Resets the memory switches to factory defaults.
2. Select “Mem Switch Clear” and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No]�
��.
3-85
Memory Switch 000 — Dialer
Initial
Setting
5 0 CED detection condition Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.
4 0
Normal  Strict
350ms 500ms 700ms 1000ms
Switch 5 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 1
3 0 DIS detect time after dialing Sets the time DIS signal is detected after dialing a
0: 55 sec number.
1: 70 sec
2 1 CED detection Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on
0: No the telephone line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED
1: Yes signal.
1 1 Dial tone detection Determines if the machine proceeds with dialing or
0: Do not dial indicates an error if no dial tone is detected within
1: Dial five seconds of going off-hook.
0 0 Phone line type for the first When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dial
phone line tone and acts according to the setting of memory
0: PSTN switch 0��
0��
0, bit 1. When set to PBX, the machine
1: PBX always dials a given number of seconds after going
off-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the number of
seconds.
3-86
Initial
Setting
5 0 DIS detection condition Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.
4 0
Normal  Strict
200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms
Switch 5 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 1
3 0 PBX mode dial pause Sets the number of seconds the machine waits
2 1 before dialing when memory switch 00��
0��
, bit 0 is set
1 0 to PBX mode.
0 0
Switch 3 2 1 0 Pause time
0000 0 sec
0001 1 sec
0010 2 sec
0011 3 sec
0100 4 sec Initial setting
0101 5 sec
0110 6 sec
0111 7 sec
1000 8 sec
1001 9 sec
1010 10 sec
1011 11 sec
1100 12 sec
1101 13 sec
1110 14 sec
1111 15 sec

Initial
Setting
0 0 Redial in D.0.7 error When set to “1”, the machine does not redial in D.0.7
0: Yes error (Incoming detection time over).
1: No
Memory Switch 003 — Factory use only
3-87
Initial
Setting
3 0 DTMF attenuation See table below
2 1 Note: The setting of this switch is available only
1 1 when setting other than 0.
0 1
Memory Switch 004 — DTMF attenuation

Switch -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -0
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Initial
Setting
6 1 Ring signal detect time Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected
5 1 after hanging up. (Fax/Tel Ready mode only.)
4 0 Switch 6 5 4
0 0 0 100 ms
0 0 1 200 ms
0 1 0 300 ms
0 1 1 400 ms
1 0 0 500 ms
1 0 1 600 ms
1 1 0 700 ms
1 1 1 800 ms
3 0 Number of CI signal��
detection Se��
lect��
the number of detection
��
time of CI
��
signal in
in Fax/Tel Ready mode the Fax/Tel Ready mode or in ��
the ringer
��
s��
ilent mode��. �
Incoming calls are answered according to this setting
0: ��
Detect 1
��
time
�� regardless of the number of rings chosen in the User
1: ��
Detect 2
��
times
�� Settings.
2 0 Dual ring detection When enabled, the machine is able to auto answer
0: No an incoming ring with an off time of 120 - 60 ms.
1: Yes
1 0 Long ring detection Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring
0: No if the ring on time is longer than two seconds.
1: Yes
0 1 F��
requency of
��
the CI signal When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency of
��
detection the incoming CI signal.
0: No
1: Yes
Memory Switch 006 ~ 009 — Factory use only
3-88
Memory Switch 010 — Transmission
Initial
Setting
7 1 Busy tone detection Set this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit is
0: No mistaken for a busy signal.
1: Yes
6 0 Fallback pattern (bps)
2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400
Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times
5 0 Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by
0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS
1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to
the second DIS signal.
4 0 V.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo
0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the
1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the
receiver not to receive the training and data. To
protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the
training using G3 high-speed modem training
(V.29).
3 1 Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2 1 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
3-89
Initial
Setting
7 0 The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR
and data transmission using this switch.
6 1
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms
Switch 7 0 0 1 1
Switch 6 0 1 0 1
5 0 Interval between DCS and TCF
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the
interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
4 0
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms
Switch 5 0 0 1 1
Switch 4 0 1 0 1
3 1
2 0 Output attenuation See table below
1 1
0 0
Memory Switch 011 — Output attenuation

Switch -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -0
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3-90
Initial
Setting
5 0 Changing the date format of When set to “1”, the machine changes the date
the transmitted TTI format of the transmitted TTI from MM:DD:YY, or
0: No vice versa.
1: Yes
4 1 TTI transmit When set at “0”, transmission of the TTI is disabled.
0: No The TTI includes the followings:
1: Yes • Sender name
• Sender��
’��
s fax number
(Note: Turning TTI • Data & time, and number of pages
transmission off may violate To set the individually��
��
transmission of them, see
local or federal regulations.) Memory SW 016.
3 0 ECM response time The time limit to receive the response signal for the
0: 3 sec ECM post message.
1: 4.8 sec
2 0 ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0: 200 ms
1: 400 ms
1 0 Interval between DIS and DCS
0 0 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms

Switch 1 0 0 1 1
Switch 0 0 1 0 1

Initial
Setting
7 0 ANSam detection During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs
0: Yes the handshake and an error occurs, set to “1”.
1: No
6 0 V.34 transmission Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
0: Yes
1: No
5 0 CSI/TSI/CIG transmit When set at “1”, transmission of the CSI, TSI and
0: Yes CIG signals are disabled.
1: No
4 0 ECM mode Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces
0: On document memory and may lengthen transmission
1: Off and reception times.
3 0 Retransmit automatically When set to “1”, retransmission disables
when receiving RTN/PIN automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
signals
0: Yes
1: No
3-91
Initial
Setting
7 0 Program individual autodialer Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 as
attributes attribute 1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and
0: No 013 as attribute 4 when fax or e-mail destination
1: Yes are registered in the address book. (Refer to page
3-107 for settings.)
2 0 Sending RTC signal when RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission.
transmission is canceled When set at “0”, the machine will send the RTC if
0: Yes the transmission is canceled. No error will occur.
1: No When set at “1”, an error will occur because
RTC will not be sent at the end of a canceled
transmission.
1 1 Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4 When set at “0”, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, the
error occurs machine will not retry the transmission.
0: Yes
1: No
0 1 Action after EOR signal Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400
0: Continue bps.
1: Discontinue

Initial
Setting
3 1 Additional data on TTI When set at “0”, the transmission of the additional
transmit data (time, the number of pages, file number, etc)
0: No is disabled.
1: Yes Note: This switch is available only when Memory
switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is
available.
2 1 Subscriber ID transmit When set at “0”, the transmission of the subscriber
0: No ID is disabled.
available.
1 1 TTI (name) transmit When set at “0”, the transmission of the name that
0: No is stored in the unit is disabled.
available.
3-92
Initial
Setting
0 0 Check only manually entered When set at “1”, the ID check transmission will
fax numbers in ID check check only the manually entered fax numbers and
transmission not check the numbers entered using the address
0: No book.
1: Yes
3-93
Memory Switch 020 — Reception
Initial
Setting
7 0 Data error rate Determines the allowable number of erred lines out
0: 10% of total lines received in a document.
1: 20%
6 0 Pause one second after A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression
sending CED in some telephone equipment. When set to “1”, the
0: No (75 ms) machine pauses one second after sending CED,
1: Yes (1 sec) which allows echo suppression to restart. This may
help with problematic overseas reception.
3 1 Receive speed (kbps)
2 1 Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines.
1 0 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Initial
Setting
7 0 Not used
6 0 DIS “inch” declaration
0: No
1: Yes
5 0 Not used
4 0 T1 timer Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dials
0: 35 sec the remote machine’s phone number, it begins
1: 20 sec sending CNG and waits this amount of time before
disconnecting the line.
3 1 Print image data when post If the received document includes the RTC, the
message is not received after machine prints the data even though the following
receiving RTC signal protocol is not succeeded.
0: No
1: Yes
2 0 DIS/DTC Extend field Setting this switch to “1” will disable ITU-T
��
superfine
��
Transmit mode.
0: Yes
1: No（Tx until Bit No.24 of
DIS/DTC）
1 0 G3 echo receive
0 1
Adjusts the delay between detection of training/TCF and sending of CFR.
100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms

Switch 1 0 0 1 1
Switch 0 0 1 0 1
3-94
Initial
Setting
6 0 V.34 reception Individual setting for V.34 reception.
0: Yes
1: No
2 0 Calling period in Fax/Tel Defines the callign period in Fax/Tel reception mode
1 0 reception mode Switch 2 1 0
0 0 000 30 seconds Inital setting
001 40 seconds
010 50 seconds
011 60 seconds
100 90 seconds
101 120 seconds
110 180 seconds
111 300 seconds
Memory Switch 030 — Modem

Initial
Setting
7 0 Number of HDLC end flags Defines the number of HDLC end flags.
6 0
5 1 Switch 7 6 5 4
4 0 0000 1
0001 2
0010 3 Initial setting
0011 4
0100 5
0101 6
0110 7
0111 8
1000 9
1001 10
1010 11
1011 12
1100 13
1101 14
1110 15
1111 16
1 0 Digital cable equalizer When set to “1”, become efficient for the line short
0: Free break, but become weak for the line noise. It’
1: Hold s available only for communication at 14,400 or
12,000 bit/s.
0 0 No use
3-95
Initial
Setting
7 0 EYE-Q check level at 0 0 1 1
6 1 7200 bps Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
4 1 9600 bps Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1

Initial
Setting
7 1 EYE-Q slice level Setting this bit to “1” enables memory switch 032,
0: Disable bits 0-3 and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 and
1: Enable enables EYE-Q check adjustment.
6 1 Check EYE-Q Set at 0: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is not
0: No checked after checking TCF.
1: Yes Set at 1: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checked
after checking TCF.
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
3-96
Initial
Setting
1 0 Delete receive echo of CFR Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode.
at the receiver side Sets this switch to “1” to resolve the problem caused
0: No of the echo of CFR.
1: Yes
0 0 Expand FSK receive time Setting this switch to “1” extend HDLC frame receive
after detecting flag timer in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds after
0: 3.3 seconds detecting pre-amble.
1: 10 seconds
3-97
Memory Switch 040 — Scanner
Initial
Setting
0 1 Document length limit Setting to unlimited will override document jam
sensing. See the table below.
Memory Mode ADF model (mm) RADF model (mm)

Switch 40 -0
0 COPY 650 650
FAX Ultra-fine 650 650
SCAN Hyper-fine 1,000 1,000
Super-fine 1,000 1,000
Fine 2000 2,000
Normal 3600 3,600
1 COPY 500 500
FAX Ultra-fine 6,50 650
SCAN Hyper-fine 1,000 1,000
Super-fine 1,000 1,000
Fine 1,000 1,000
Normal 1,000 1,000
Memory Switch 060 — Remote reception

Initial
Setting
6 1 CML relay off time after When dialing from the keypad, phone line noise
dialing may occur as the CML relay switches on and off.
0: 1 sec Set this switch to “0” to avoid this.
1: 200 ms
5 0 DTMF tones heard through Determines if DTMF tones are produced through
handset the handset in off-hook dialing.
0: No
1: Yes
0 0 Remote reception from fax When this switch is set to “0”, fax-calls answered
handset manually using the handset is available to receive
0: No by pressing <Start>.
1: Yes
3-98
Initial
Setting
3 0 Off-hook / on-hook detect Sets the time interval between the on-hook and off-
2 1 time hook (or off-hook/on-hook) condition.
1 0 Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
0 0 0000 0 ms
0001 100 ms
0010 200 ms
0011 300 ms
0100 400 ms Initial setting
0101 500 ms
0110 600 ms
0111 700 ms
1000 800 ms
1001 900 ms
1 0 1 0 1000 ms
1 0 1 1 1100 ms
1 1 0 0 1200 ms
1 1 0 1 1300 ms
1 1 1 0 1400 ms
1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-99
Initial
Setting
4 1 CNG detect in Ans/Fax ready When set to “1”, the machine detects the CNG
0: No signal in Ans/Fax ready.
1: Yes
3 0 Switch-hook time If the switch hook is quickly depressed and
2 0 released, switch-to-fax will occur. This setting
1 1 adjusts how quickly the switch hook activation must
0 1 be.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
0000 0 ms
0001 100 ms
0010 200 ms
0011 300 ms Initial setting
0100 400 ms
0101 500 ms
0110 600 ms
0111 700 ms
1000 800 ms
1001 900 ms
1 0 1 0 1000 ms
1 0 1 1 1100 ms
1 1 0 0 1200 ms
1 1 0 1 1300 ms
1 1 1 0 1400 ms
1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-100
Memory Switch 064 — Remote reception and TAD interface
Initial
Setting
7 0 CNG detect period after TAD Sets the period during which CNG is detected after
begins recording ICM the TAD begins recording incoming message.
Switch 7 6 5 4 Time
0000 0 sec
0001 10 sec
6 0 0010 20 sec
0100 40 sec
0101 50 sec
0110 60 sec
5 1 0111 70 sec
1000 80 sec
1001 90 sec
1 0 1 0 100 sec
1 0 1 1 110 sec
4 1 1 1 0 0 120 sec
1 1 0 1 130 sec
1 1 1 0 140 sec
1 1 1 1 150 sec
3 0 CNG detect period after TAD Sets the period during which CNG is detected after
answers the TAD answers an incoming call.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
0000 0 sec
2 0 0010 20 sec
0011 30 sec
0100 40 sec
0101 50 sec
0110 60 sec
1 0 0111 70 sec
1000 80 sec
1001 90 sec
1 0 1 0 100 sec
1 0 1 1 110 sec
0 1 1 1 0 0 120 sec
1 1 0 1 130 sec
1 1 1 0 140 sec
1 1 1 1 150 sec
Eingehende Anrufe
TAD zeigt ausgehende Meldung an TAD zeichnet eingehende Meldung auf
CNG-Erkennung ist aktiv CNG-Erkennung ist aktiv

(eingestellt durch Speicherschalter 64, Bit 0-3) (eingestellt durch Speicherschalter 64, Bit 4-7)
3-101
Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjustment of CI detect time Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI
6 0 detect time.
5 0
4 0 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Time
11111 150 msec
3 0
11101 140 msec
: :
01001 40 msec
00111 30 msec
00101 20 msec
00011 10 msec
00000 0 msec Initial setting
00010 -10 msec
00100 -20 msec
00110 -30 msec
01000 -40 msec
: :
11100 -140 msec
11110 -150 msec
0 0 Beep if fax handset hang up Determines if your machine beeps when having left
0: Yes the fax’s handset hanging up after communication.
1: No
3-102
Memory Switch 070 — Operation
Initial
Setting
7 0 Display error line The number of error lines contained in the received
0: No data will be shown in the LCD.
1: Yes
6 0 Tonal line monitor Allows fax communication to be heard through the
0: No monitor speaker.
1: Yes
4 0 Sort autodialer printout Specifies how entries on autodialer printouts are
0: Sort by autodialer location sorted.
1: Sort by location ID
3 1 Print check message if power In the event of two power losses in a 40-hour
is lost period, documents will be lost. When power is
0: No restored, a check message will print.
1: Yes
2 1 Print page if error occurs For easy identification, the first page of a document
during memory transmission stored for memory transmission will print along a
0: No check message if an error occurs during memory
1: Yes transmission.
1 1 Print check message To notify the user of an error, a check message can
0: No be printed if a communication error occurs.
1: Yes
3-103
Initial
Setting
5 1 Print TCR with the original For easy identification, the first page of a document
page during memory stored for memory transmission will print along a
transmission when the result TCR when the transmission result is NG.
is NG
0: No
1: Yes
3 1 Print TCR with the original For easy identification, the first page of a document
page during memory stored for memory transmission will print along a
transmission when the result TCR when the transmission result is OK.
is OK
0: No
1: Yes
0 0 Display modem speed The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD.
0: No
1: Yes
Memory switch071 — Print TCR with the original page

Switch 3 0 1
Switch 5 0 1 0 1
When Memory transmission was OK, … No No Yes Yes
When Memory transmission was NG, … No Yes No Yes
When all broadcast transmissions were OK, … No No Yes Yes
When some broadcast transmissions were NG, … No Yes No Yes

Initial
Setting
1 1 Erase polled document Determines if a document stored for polling is
0: No erased after being polled.
1: Yes
Memory Switch 077 ~ 096 --- Factory use only
3-104
Memory Switch 097 --- Other functions
Initial
Setting
7 0 Day light saving time This switch sets the month when the day light sav-
6 0 (Summer time) start month ing time (summer time) begins.
4 1 0000 March
0001 January
0010 February
0011 March Initial setting
0100 April
0101 May
0110 June
0111 July
1000 August
1001 September
1010 October
1011 November
1011 December
(Summer time) start week ing time (summer time) begins.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
0 0 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the last week
2 1
0 0 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the first week
1 0
0 0 1 0 Sunday 1:00 of the second week
0 1
0 0 1 1 Sunday 1:00 of the third week
0 1 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the fourth week
0 1 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the last week of
the month Initial setting
3-105
Memory Switch 098 --- Other functions
Initial
Setting
6 0 (Summer time) end month ing time (summer time) ends.
4 0 0000 October
0001 January
0010 February
0011 March
0100 April
0101 May
0110 June
0111 July
1000 August
1001 September
1010 October Initial setting
1011 November
1011 December
(Summer time) end week ing time (summer time) ends.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
0 0 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the last week
2 1
0 0 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the first week
1 0
0 0 1 0 Sunday 1:00 of the second week
0 1
0 0 1 1 Sunday 1:00 of the third week
0 1 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the fourth week
0 1 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the last week of
the month Initial setting
Memory Switch 099 --- Factory use only
3-106
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes
This function allows the user to configure an individual address book entry with the settings shown in
Memory Switches 010, 011, 012 and 013.
To set the individual attributes:

1. Change memory switch 015, bit 7 to “1”. (See setting 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches for more
information on changing the switch.)
2. When the function is enabled, an “Attribute” option is added to the speed dial registration steps. The
extra steps showing Attribute 1, Attribute 2, Attribute 3, and Attribute 4 are added as the last step.
3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table. To change a setting, press
< > or < > until the cursor is below the desired bit position; then press “1” or “0” to make the
change.
4. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute.
5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6. To finish the registration, press [Close].
3-107
Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)
Initial
Setting
7 1 Busy tone detection Sets this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit
0: No is mistaken for a busy signal.
1: Yes
6 0 Fallback pattern (bps)
2400 4800 7200 9600 14400
Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times
5 0 Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by
0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS
1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to
the second DIS signal.
4 0 V.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo
0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the
1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the
receiver not to receive the training and data. To
protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the
training using G3 high-speed modem training
(V.29).
3 1 Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1
3-108
Initial
Setting
7 0 The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR
and data transmission using this switch.
6 1
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms
Switch 7 0 0 1 1
Switch 6 0 1 0 1
5 0 Interval between DCS and TCF
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the
interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
4 0
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms
Switch 5 0 0 1 1
Switch 4 0 1 0 1
3 1
2 0 Output attenuation See table
��
below�.
1 1
0 0
Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.

Switch -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -0
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3-109
Initial
Setting
5 0 Changing the date format of When set to “1”, the machine changes the date
the transmitted TTI format of the transmitted TTI from MM: DD: YY, or
0: No vice versa.
1: Yes
4 1 TTI transmit When set at “0”, transmission of the TTI is disabled.
0: No The TTI includes the followings:
1: Yes • Sender name
• Sender��
’��
s fax number
(Note: Turning TTI • Data & time, and number of pages
transmission off may violate To set the individually��
��
transmission of them, see
local or federal regulations.) Memory SW 016.
3 0 ECM response time The time limit to receive the response signal for the
0: 3 sec ECM post message.
1: 4.8 sec
2 0 ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0: 200 ms
1: 400 ms
1 0 Interval between DIS and DCS
0 0 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms

Switch 1 0 0 1 1
Switch 0 0 1 0 1
3-110
Initial
Setting
7 0 ANSam detection During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs
0: Yes the handshake and an error occurs, set to “1”.
1: No
6 0 V.34 transmission Individual setting for V.34 transmission.

0: Yes
1: No

4 0 ECM mode Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces
0: On document memory and may lengthen transmission
1: Off and reception times.
3 0 Retransmit automatically When set to “1”, retransmission disables
when receiving RTN/PIN automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
signals
0: Yes
1: No
3-111
3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment
3.5.1 Setting the Unique Switches
2. Select “Switch Edit” and press [Enter].
4. Press [Enter].
5. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.5. To navigate through the unique switch settings:
• Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed unique switch and return to the unique
switch edit screen.
• Press [Close] not to save the setting of the displayed unique switch.
6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press <Reset>to return the machine to standby.
3.5.2 Clearing the Unique Switches

Resets the unique switches to factory defaults.
2. Select “Switch Clear” and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes].The unique switches will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No].
4. Press <Reset> o return the machine to standby.
3-112
Unique Switch 000 — Dialer
Initial
Setting
6 0 Congestion tone detection Setting this switch to “0” ignores telephone line
0: No congestion tones.
1: Yes
5 1 Ring back tone wait time Sets the time until the ring back tone begins after
(seconds) answering an incoming call in the Fax/Tel Ready or
3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 Tel/Fax Ready mode.
4 1 Switch 5: 0 0 1 1
Switch 4: 0 1 0 1

Initial
Setting
3 0 Enable the 1st tone key
0: No
1: Yes
2 0 Enable the 2nd tone key
0: No
1: Yes
1 1 Enable the dial prefix key
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 002 — Factory use only

Initial
Setting
3 0 The period before detecting Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
2 0 busytone after dialing 1111 1500 ms
1 0 1110 1400 ms
0 0 
1000 800 ms
0111 700 ms
0110 600 ms
0101 500 ms
0100 400 ms (Initial setting)
0011 300 ms
0010 200 ms
0001 100 ms
0000 0 ms
Unique Switch 004 ~ 009 — Factory use only
3-113
Unique Switch 010 — Transmission
Initial
Setting
5 1 TTI reduction in normal mode Determine whether to transmit the TTI information
0: No reduced 50% in vertical direction.
1: Yes
4 0 TTI reduction in fine and Determine whether to transmit the TTI information
superfine mode reduced 50% in vertical direction.
0: No
1: Yes
3 1 Including TTI inside the Setting this switch to “0” transmit the document
document length added with the TTI. Setting it to “1” transmit
0: No the length including TTI inside the document.
1: Yes However in this case, the image at the top of the
document might be overlapped with TTI.
(TTI length: 4.2 mm)
1 1 The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission
1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times
0 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
3-114
Initial
Setting
Note: This setting takes effect only when Unique
Send result to the sender in
Switch 016 -2 is set to “1”.
relayed reception
6 0 Determine whether to send the result of reception
0: No
to the sender in relayed reception and F-code relay
1: Yes
reception.
5 0 Not used
0 1 V.8 handshake in real time Determine whether the to do handshaking with V.8
Tx recommendation if real time transmission.
0: No
1: Yes

Initial
Setting
7 1 Available *, # and space Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space
upon F-code box registration are available upon F-code box registration.
0: No
1: Yes
Available *, # and space Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space
upon F-code communicating are available upon F-code communicating.
6 1
0: No
1: Yes
5 0 Ignore space in F-code ID Determines if checking the space stored in the
0: Yes F-code ID.
1: No
4 1 F-code sub-frame off Do not send the sub-address and password of
0: Send F-code box when a point of sending DCS signal
1: Not send after EOM signal.
3 0 Send F-code box’s TTI Transmit the sub-address and box name of F-code
0: No box with F-code polling document.
1: Yes
1 0 Retrieve document Retrieve the document received in F-code
0: No SecureMail box by polling transmission.
1: Yes
0 1 Ignore F-code bit Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS
0: No signal at F-code polled transmission.
1: Yes
Note: The “F-code communication” is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code
(SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.
3-115
Initial
Setting
1 1 JBIG transmission Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.
0: No
1: Yes

Initial
Setting
4 0 Disconnect the line when Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line
the transmission speed falls when the transmission speed fall down under 7200
down under 7200 bps bps.
0: No
1: Yes
3 0 Disconnect the line when Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line
the transmission speed falls when the transmission speed fall down under 4800
down under 4800 bps bps.
0: No
1: Yes
2 0 Not used
1 0 Not used
0 0 Transmission when disable to Determines the action when disable to detect first
detect first NSF in real time NSF in real time transmission.
transmission.
0: Retry to detect NSF
1: Transmit with the standard
protocol
3-116
Unique Switch 020 — Reception
Initial
Setting
5 0 No use
4 1 Transmit CED signal Determines if sending CED signal.
0: No
1: Yes
3 1 Pseudo-ring start time Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins after
(seconds) answering an incoming call.
5 6 8 10 (Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)
2 0 Switch 3: 0 0 1 1
Switch 2: 0 1 0 1
1 1 Printout the pages completed Determines if whether to printout the page which
to receive during receiving data is completed to receive during receiving it into
into memory fax’s memory.
0: No
1: Yes

Initial
Setting
3 1 TCF check time If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the
(in 100 ms units) result, lengthen the TCF check time.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
2 0 0000 0 ms
0001 100 ms
0010 200 ms
0011 300 ms
0100 400 ms
0101 500 ms
1 0 0110 600 ms
0111 700 ms
1000 800 ms  Initial setting
1001 900 ms
1010 1000 ms
1011 1100 ms
0 0 1100 1200 ms
1101 1300 ms
1110 1400 ms
1111 1500 ms
3-117
Initial
Setting
3 1 JBIG reception Determines how documents from the remote fax are
0: No received.
1: Yes
2 0 Receive the junk fax When the block junk fax feature is set to Mode 2
0: Yes and the fax does not receive the TSI signal from the
1: No remote fax, determine if receiving the fax other than
the remote fax number set to the block junk dial list.

Initial
Setting
3 0 Not used
2 1 Receiving fax in 600 dpi� Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi.
(S-fine)
0��
: No
1: Yes
3-118
Unique Switch 030 — Modem
Initial
Setting
5 1 3429 baud symbol rate when If the error frame often occurs because of the
communicating at V.34 symbol rate is too high, setting this switch to
0: No “1” mask that symbol rate and keep down the
1: Yes occurrence of error frame.
4 1 3200 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0 1 2400 baud symbol rate when See above (switch 5 to 2).
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 032 — Modem

Initial
Setting
1 1 ANSam output time The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave
0: 3 sec signal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to “1”
1: 4 sec when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.
3-119
Unique Switch 040 — Scanner
Initial
Setting
7 0 Factiory use only
0 1 Resolution in “Photo” mode Superfine: 8x15.4dot/mm
transmission Hyperfine: 16x15.4dot/mm
0: Superfine
1: Hyperfine

Initial
Setting
7 1 Set the fixed ratio for copy When set to “1”, the ratio will be calculated in detail
and the auto ratio in detail automatically according to the document size and
0: No the recording paper size.
1: Yes
0 1 Rotate and store in memory Note:This setting takes effect only when the totate
0: No reception is activated.
1: Yes Rotate an A4 and store it as A4 document in
memory.

Initial
Setting
7 0 Confirmation stamp stamping Adjust the time length to stamp.
6 0 time Adjustment
5 0 Switch 7 6 5 Time
111 700 ms
110 600 ms
101 500 ms
100 400 ms
010 200 ms
001 100 ms
4 0 Scanner heater The optional scanner heater turns on / off.
0: On
1: Off
3 0 Stop scanning by each page Turn this switch on, when document jam occurs
0: No frequently in time-consuming scanning such as
1: Yes enlarge scanning.
3-120
Initial
Setting
7 0 Black spots measures for Tx Adjust this switch when black spots are printed
6 0 documents with ground color on Tx documents with ground color (normal
resolution).
Switch 7 6 Settings
0 0 Normal
0 1 Measures (Half tone priority)
1 0 Measures (Ruled lines priority)

3 0 Motor stopping period for This determines the period from ADF motor stop to
2 0 Confirmation stamp stamping the confirmation stamp.
1 0 Switch 3 2 1 Settings
1 1 1 700 ms
1 1 0 600 ms
1 0 1 500 ms
1 0 0 400 ms
0 1 1 300 ms
0 1 0 200 ms
0 0 1 100 ms
0 0 0 0 ms

Initial
Setting
5 0 Left side edge document Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings
4 0 margin adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 1 26.67 mm
3 0 :
2 0 Each setting changes by 1 1 1 1 0 0 25.40 mm
0.4233 mm. :
1 0
1 1 0 0 1 0 21.17 mm
0 0 Left side means the side of :
the scanning position. 1 0 1 0 0 0 16.93 mm
:
0 1 1 1 1 0 12.70 mm
:
0 1 0 1 0 1 8.47 mm
:
0 0 0 1 0 1 4.23 mm
:
0 0 0 0 0 1 0.42 mm
0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 mm
3-121
Initial
Setting
5 0 Right side edge document Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings
4 0 margin adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 1 26.67 mm
3 0 :
2 0 Each setting changes by 1 1 1 1 0 0 25.40 mm
0.4233 mm. :
1 0
1 1 0 0 1 0 21.17 mm
0 0 Right side means the :
opposite side of the scanning 1 0 1 0 0 0 16.93 mm
position. :
0 1 1 1 1 0 12.70 mm
:
0 1 0 1 0 1 8.47 mm
:
0 0 0 1 0 1 4.23 mm
:
0 0 0 0 0 1 0.42 mm
0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 mm
3-122
Initial
Setting
7 0 Receive the call then When this switch is set to “1”, out-of paper recep-
machine cannot print tion function is not available.
0: Yes
1: No
5 0 Leading edge document Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings
4 0 margin adjustment upon 000000 0 mm
3 0 scanning using FBS�. 000001 1 mm
2 0 000010 2 mm
Adjusts the leading edge 000011 3 mm
1 0
margin when scanning 000100 4 mm
0 0 document by FBS. 000101 5 mm
000110 6 mm
Each setting changes by 000111 7 mm
1 mm. 001000 8 mm
001001 9 mm
001010 10 mm
001011 11 mm
001100 12 mm
001101 13 mm
001110 14 mm
001111 15 mm
010000 16 mm
010001 17 mm
010010 18 mm
010011 19 mm
010100 20 mm
010101 21 mm
010110 22 mm
010111 23 mm
011000 24 mm
011001 25 mm
:
111111 63 mm
3-123
Initial
Setting
5 0 Trailing edge document Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings
4 0 margin adjustment upon 000000 0 mm
3 0 scanning using FBS 000001 1 mm
2 0 000010 2 mm
Adjusts the trailing edge 000011 3 mm
1 0
margin when scanning 000100 4 mm
0 0 document by FBS. 000101 5 mm
000110 6 mm
Each setting changes by 000111 7 mm
1 mm. 001000 8 mm
001001 9 mm
001010 10 mm
001011 11 mm
001100 12 mm
001101 13 mm
001110 14 mm
001111 15 mm
010000 16 mm
010001 17 mm
010010 18 mm
010011 19 mm
010100 20 mm
010101 21 mm
010110 22 mm
010111 23 mm
011000 24 mm
011001 25 mm
:
:
111111 63 mm
3-124
Unique Switch 050 — Printer
Initial
Setting
6 0 Smoothing in list printing Smooths the data scanned in each resolution mode.
0: No
1: Yes
5 1 Smoothing S-Fine mode
(200 x 400 dpi) mode Rotate
reception
0: No
1: Yes
4 1 Smoothing in Normal mode
Rotate reception
0: No
1: Yes
3 0 Smoothing in H-Fine (400 x
400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
2 1 Smoothing in S-Fine (200 x
400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
1 0 Smoothing in Fine mode
0: No
1: Yes
0 1 Smoothing in Normal mode
0: No
1: Yes

Initial
Setting
0 0 Reduce print If the received fax is larger than the paper in the
0: No cassettes, setting this switch to “1” means the
1: Yes document will be printed on one page by reduction.

Initial
Setting
0 0 Printing margin adjustment
0: Normal
1: No margin
3-125
Initial
Setting
7 0 Printer density adjustment. Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0
5 0 00000000 Not available
4 0 00000001 Lightest
00000010 :
3 0
00000011 :
2 0 00000100
1 1
0 1 00000011 Normal  Initial setting
00000110 :
00001001 Darkest
00001011 Not available
: ↓
Unique Switch 057 — Remote reception

Initial
Setting
5 0 Paper selection priority e.g. B5 size is received:
0: Less margin “0” will print them on to A4 papers
1: Same paper width “1” will print them on to B4 papers
Unique Switch 058 — Remote reception

Initial
Setting
7 0 Printable pages after Switch 76543210 Toner
6 1 “Replace Toner” has 11111111 255 pages
appeared :
11001000 200 pages
5 1 :
4 0 10010110 150 pages
:
3 0
01100100 100 pages
2 1 :
1 0 00110010 50 pages
0 0 :
00000001 1 page
00000000 0 page
3-126
Unique Switch 066 – Remote reception and TAD interface

Initial
Setting
0 0 Display the error message, If this is set to “0”, the machine does not display the
“Systemstatus instabil Strom error message, after it has recovered from a DAA
aus- und ein”. NCU error.
0: Yes
1: No
Unique Switch 067 – Remote reception and TAD interface

Initial
Setting
7 0 Start detecting the busy tone
before pseudo-ring ringing
starts
0: No
1: Yes
6 1 Detect busy tone during
pseudo-ring ringing
0: No
1: Yes
5 0 No use
4 0 CNG detection during OGM
output in ANS Ready
0: Yes
1: No
3 0 Number of detection DTMF Sets the number of detection the DTMF during
Ans/Fax Ready mode.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Number of detection

0000 Not detect
2 0 0001 1
0010 2
0011 3 Initial setting
0100 4
0101 5
1 1 0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10

0 1 1111 15
Unique Switch 068 --- Factory use only
3-127
Unique Switch 069 – Remote reception
Initial
Setting
7 0 The line voltage that TEL1 Switch 7654321 Settings
6 0 and TEL2 are regarded as
5 1 off-hooked. 1111111 127 volt
4 0 :
1100100 100 volt
3 1
:
2 0 1010000 80 volt
1 0 :
1 10010 50 volt
:
0011110 30 volt
:
0010100 20 volt
:
0001010 10 volt
:
0000101 5 volt
:
0000010 2 volt
0000001 1 volt
0000000 0 volt
0 0 Fixing the service report fax When set to “1”, the fax number entered in service
number report setting “Location 1” will be unable to edit by
0: No (able to edit) the user.
1: Yes (unable to edit)
3-128
Unique Switch 070 — Operation
Initial
Setting
6 1 LCD error message After an error message has printed, the setting of
0: Remains in LCD this switch determines if the error message will
1: Returns to standby remain in the display.
5 1 Buzzer/keypad volume Switch OFF Low Medium Maximum
4 0 5 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 1
2 0 Standby mode priority
0: Copy
1: Fax

Initial
Setting
7 1 Line monitor in Quick memory
transmission
0: Off
1: On
6 0 Switch LCD language If this switch is set to on, the LCD language is
0: No available to switch from Chinese to English and
1: Yes Japanese, by pressing <Menu> and <#>.
1 0 Rx document to polling Retrieve the document received in the memory by
document polling transmission.
0: No
1: Yes
3-129
Initial
Setting
2 0 Send service report
0: No
1: Yes
Transmit consumable order If this switch is set to “1”, the machine will transmit
sheet the consumable order sheet automatically when the
0: No drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the
0 0 1: Yes toner cartridge is near empty.
Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must
register several items. See “3.16 Consumable
order sheet” page 3-161.

Initial
Setting
7 0 Print consumable order sheet If this switch is set to “1”, the machine will print the
0: No consumable order sheet automatically when the
1: Yes drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the
toner cartridge is near empty.
Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must
register several items. See “3.16 Consumable
order sheet” page 3-161.
3-130
Initial
Setting
2 1 Priority of consumable order When the drum cartridge has reached its design life,
sheet printing or the toner cartridge is empty, the machine prints a
consumable order sheet.
0: Print after the current When this switch is set at “0”, the machine will
printing job is completed not print consumable order sheet until the current
1: Print immediately printing job is finished.
1 0 Print the transmission time When set to “0”, the transmission time will be
on TCR printed on TCR.
0: Print the transmit time
1: Blank
0 0 When receive a fax message
during Auto power off mode,
the LCD will be in standby
mode
0: No
1: Yes

Initial
Setting
3 1 Journal list printing order
0: From old history
1: From new history
2 0 Period to press the <Energy Switch 2 1 0 Time
1 1 Save> to go to sleep mode 111 7 seconds
0 1 110 6 seconds
101 5 seconds
100 4 seconds
011 3 seconds
010 2 seconds
001 1 second
3-131
Initial
Setting
2 0 Double count up the scan If this is set to “1”, the machine counts 2 pages for
counter for A3 one A3 size document scanning.
0: No
1: Yes
1 0 Double count up the print If this is set to “1”, the machine counts 2 pages for
counter for A3 one A3 size document printing.
0: No
1: Yes

Initial
Setting
2 0 The maximum enlarge ratio If this is set to “1”, the maximum scanning
in RADF scan magnification of MFX-2325 and MFX-2725 will be
0: 200 % 400%.
1: 400 %
3-132
Unique Switch 084 – Miscellaneous

Initial
Setting
7 0 Does not send the The value set with this switch (printed pages) will
6 0 consumable order sheet in be compared with the value counted up in life moni-
5 0 “toner near empty” condition. tor (printed pages after the toner is replaced). If this
4 0 value is larger than the value in life monitor when
the machine goes to “toner near empty” condition,
3 0
the installed toner is not considered as new toner
2 0 and the consumable order sheet will not be printed.
1 0
0 0
Switch 76543210 Settings
11111111 12750 pages
:
01100100 5000 pages
:
0110010 2500 pages
:
00010100 1000 pages
:
00001010 500 pages
:
00000101 250 pages (initial setting)
:
00000010 100 pages
00000001 50 pages
00000000 0
3-133
Unique Switch 085 — Miscellaneous
Initial
Setting
6 0 Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when the drum is Note: For this feature to
��
work correctly, you must
��
near end register several items. See “3.16
��
Consumable
0: Yes order sheet”��
page��
3-161�.
1: No
5 0 Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when toner is Note: For this feature to
��
work correctly, you must
��
near empty register several items. See “3.16
��
Consumable
0: Yes order sheet”��
page��
3-161�.
1: No
4 0 Print the receive time stamp Deterimine whether to print the receive time stamp
within the document within the document print area or not.
0: No
1: Yes
3 0 “Next doc” default setting Determine the default setting for “Next doc”
when scanning with ADF scanning with ADF.
0: No If it is set to “0” the default setting for Next doc is
1: Yes “No”, if is “1” the setting is “Yes”.
2 1 “Next doc” default setting Determine the default setting for “Next doc”
when scanning with FBS scanning with FBS.
0: No If it is set to “0” the default setting for Next doc is
1: Yes “No”, if is “1” the setting is “Yes”.
1 0 Enlarging the 24 dot-font- Determine to print the characters on cover page or
characters Tx report to 150% or not.
0: Yes
1: No
0 0 Muti-T.30 monitor journal If this setting is “Yes”, the journal report will be
number printed not in the consecuted number but in the
0: No table number to see the T.30 monitor.
1: Yes

Initial
Setting
7 0 Add TSI infromation to the Determine to add the senders fax number to the
receive time stamp receive stamp or not.
0: No
1: Yes
3-134
Initial
Setting
2 0 Print the sending document
on the error massage sheet
0: No
1: Yes
0 0 Shortcut the fax number on Determine whether to print only the last 25
the journal list characters of the fax number on the journal list and
0: No replace the rest with “...”.
1: Yes

Initial
Setting
7 0 Reaction time to the keys on Switch 7 6 5 4 Time
6 1 the touch screen 1111 150 ms
5 0 1110 140 ms
4 0 
0101 50 ms

0010 20 ms
0001 10 ms
0000 0 ms
3-135

Initial
Setting
6 0 Multi line setting This switch enables it to set the first and second
0: No line differently.
1: Yes
3-136
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings
User programmed information such as address book entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier
(TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the unit’s Random Access Memory (RAM). A battery back up
holds this information, when the power is lost.
This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches.
Therefore, this setting is useful to reset the user-programmed information but leave specific
parameters and switches configured for a particular telephone system, etc.
To reset only each switch, see page 3-3, 3-85 and 3-112.
Note: If desired, the All RAM Clear setting can be used to erase all users programmed information, all
documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
For information on the All RAM Clear setting, see below.
1. To clear programmed data and user settings, from standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>.
2. Press [Yes].
Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3.7 All RAM Clear

The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user-programmed information, all documents in memory, and
reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when the
All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings,
one-touch and speed dial listings to help in reprogramming this information.
Note: T
he All RAM Clear does not clear the machine parameters, life monitor and consumable order
sheet. If you need to clear them, see “Clearing the machine parameters” page 3-3, “Clear Life
Monitor” page 3-165 or “Clear consumable order sheet” on page 3-164.
1. To perform an All RAM Clear, from standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <3>.
2. Press [Yes].
Note: To finish the operation without performing RAM clear, press [No].
3-137
3.8 T.30 Monitor
In all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLC
structure is shown below.
Präambel Binär codierte Daten
NSF-Frame CSI-Frame DIS-Frame

(Nicht-Standard-Funktionen) (ID des angerufenen Teilnehmers) (Digitales Identifizierungssignal)
Steuerung Faksimile- Faksimile- Blockprüfung

Flag Flag Adresse
Steuerfeld Datenfeld (FCS)
Die Daten aus diesem

Abschnitt werden im
T.30-Monitor gedruckt.
The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8-bit octet information
follows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimile
procedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.
3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor

This mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication.
2. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.
3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor

The communications on the journal list are able to print.
1. Set the unique switch for Multi T.30 monitor to "1 (On)". (Unique switch 85 switch 0 )
2. Print the journal list and check the communication number of which to print the T.30 Monitor.
4. Enter the communication number and press [Enter].

5. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.
3-138
3.8.3 How to see the print out
(Example for fax transmission)
3-139
(Example for fax reception)
TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T.30 report

RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine
DATA: Additional 8-bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures. In the list, the data are
in hexadecimal digits. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal.
TCF : TCF check sequence
PIX : Image data
[V17 MMR A3 0 F E]
Error Correction Mode (E=ECM on, page=EMC off)
Mode (S=8dot/mm x 15.4l/mm F=Fine N=Normal)
Receiver's minimum scan line time capability
Recording width document size
Compressing method
Data signalling rate
3-140
NSF, NSC, NSS:
NSF, NSC, NSS are nonstandard unit frames. The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T.30.
The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. The first byte refers to the
country code. The second byte is a spare; it is 00 (hex) presently. The third byte is the manufacturer
code.
TxFrame RxFrame DATA

NSF 20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
The third byte is the manufactures code

The second byte is spare; currently set at 00H
The first byte indicates the country code
Indicates the NSF code
CSI, CIG, TSI:

CSI, CIG, TSI is composed of a maximum 20-digit number comprising the country code, area code,
and subscriber’s telephone number. In the printed results, printing starts from the least significant digit
of the telephone number. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20-digit number
and their value. Below the code table is a CSI example.
Code Value Code Value Code Value Code Value

20 Space 32 2 35 5 38 8
30 0 33 3 36 6 39 9
31 1 34 4 37 7 2B +
An example telephone number of 123-456-7890 is represented as:

CIS 30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 20 20 20 20
DIS, DTC, DCS:

DIS, DTC, DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit and
receive speeds, coding methods, printer speed, etc.

DIS 00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00
The bits are in the following order:

( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17)
(32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41)
(56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57)
Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number:
Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary
0 0000 4 0100 8 1000 C 1100
1 0001 5 0101 9 1001 D 1101
2 0010 6 0110 A 1010 E 1110
3 0011 7 0111 B 1011 F 1111
So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
3-141
A transmission with PPR signal:
The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post-message signal and PPR signal.

PPS MPS BF 4F 00 00 0F
PPR BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
In PPS signal FIF, the pages, blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value.
So in the above case:
Pages: 00 means one page
Blocks: 00 means one block
Frames: 0F means 16 frames
In PPR signal FIF, the error frame will be displayed with "1". In the above case the fist frame is "F0"
and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7.
3-142
3.9 Printer maintenance mode
In case of followings, use this mode.
• When you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller.
• |When “Call Service : XX” message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause of
the “Call Service : XX” error message.
 When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller, you must set the count of replacement
manually
To access the printer maintenance mode:
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
The mode is contained within two main menu levels.
2. Select “Enter Replace Counter”, and press [Enter].

3. The LCD shows:
4. Select either “Replace Fuser” or “Replace Transfer” according to the parts you have replaced, and
press [Enter].
If you have selected “Replace Fuser”, the LCD shows:
5. Press [YES]. The machine goes back to standby mode.
 When “Call Service� :�� XX��

��” message
��
is displayed o��
��
n the LCD
To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the “Call Service��
: XX��
” error
message.
Note: See “4.5 Call Service Error” page 4-8 for the printer error messages and an explanation of each
are outlined.
3-143
3.10 Monitor speaker
If you need to monitor the signal of fax communication, turn this mode to on. You can hear the signal
sound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction.
1. From standby mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <8>.
2. Select [On], and press [Enter] to turn the mode on.

Note: To turn this mode off, perform step 1 and 2 by selecting [Off].
3-144
3.11 Test Modes
This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included
are followings:
• Life monitor
• Printer Test
• Stamp test mode
• Port Status (Factory use only)
• Background level setting
• Roller Cleaning
• Image Quality Test (Factory use only)
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> to enter the test mode.
3.11.1 Life Monitor

The life monitor displays the current software version, the total number of pages scanned, printed, and
transmitted, the number of drums replaced and the total page count on the current drum.
Note: The All RAM Clear setting does not clear the life monitor. To clear, see below.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select “Life Monitor” and press [Enter].
2. Pressing the cursor key up or down displays the following values:
3-145
• ROM Ver.0 = displays software version
• 01 to 02 = displays software version of the optional kit
• Serial No. = displays the machine’s serial number
• Installation Date = displays the machine’s setup date
• Scan Pages = displays total pages scanned
• Print Pages = displays total pages printed
• Tx Pages = displays total pages transmitted
• Drum Replaced # = displays drum replaced times
• Drum Life Time = displays total working seconds of current drum
• Drum Life = displays total pages printed on current drum
• Toner Replaced # = displays toner cartridge replaced count
• Toner Life = displays total pages printed on current toner cartridge
• Fuser Replaced Co = displays fuser replaced count
• Fuser Life = displays total pages printed on fuser
• Transfer Rplcd Co = displays transfer roller replaced count
• Transfer Life = displays total pages printed on current transfer roller
3. Press [Close] to exit the display life monitor
3-146
3.11.2 Printer Test
The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below.
Checkered Squares Paper Scum
Half-tone 1 Halft-tone 2 White Black
��
D��
: Halftone ��
E��
: Halftone2 ��
F��
: White ��
G��
: Black
Ladder Magin pattern
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select “Test Pattern Print” and press [Enter].
3-147
2. Select the desired pattern displayed and press [Enter].
3. Select the paper size to test and press [Enter].
4. Press [Yes].
The selected pattern will be printed continuously.

Note: Press <Stop> to stop printing.
5. To select another pattern, repeat the steps 1 to 4.
3.11.3 Stamp test mode

This mode tests the stamp. When it is set to on, the stamp will be stamped on the document at a
regular interval.
Note: The stamp is an option unit.
1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF).

2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select “Stamp Test mode” and press [Enter].
3. Press [Enter] to start the stamp test.

4. Press <Stop> to exit the stamp test mode.
3.11.4 Port Status

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3-148
3.11.5 Set Background Level
The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a
scanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced;
therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed.
The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents.
Note:The background seal at the inside of the scanner cover should be cleaned prior to setting the
background level to ensure an accurate reading.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select “Background level” and press [Enter].
2. Press [Start] to start the background level setting.

After the background level setting, the machine goes back to the standby mode.
3.11.6 Roller Cleaning

Note: The mode is available for MFX-2725 and MFX-2325 only.
This mode rotates the platen roller so that you can clean the surface of it.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select “Roller Cleaning” and press [Enter].
2. Open the platen cover.

3. Every time you press [Start], the roller rotates one quarter. Alternately press [Start] and clean the
roller until all the surface becomes clean.
4. Press <Stop> to exit the roller cleaning mode.
3.11.7 Image quality test
3-149
3.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and
Unique Switch Settings
This function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique switch set-
tings. The list shows the default and current settings for each. After printing, the unit returns to standby.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
2. Press [Yes] to start printing.
3-150
3.13 Factory Functions
This factory functions provide several machine testes including LED and LCD tests, a keypad test, memory
tests, a RTC test, etc.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>.
2. To select the desired test mode, press <> or <> and scroll the list.
• Prints a list of the Factory Functions
• LED test
• LCD test
• Panel test
• SRAM check
• DRAM check
• RTC test
• Page memory check
• ATDC adjustment
• Generate bell test
• Toner supply mode
• Lamp measurement
• Thermistor Temperature Log
3.13.1 Function List

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>.
2. Select “Function List” and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes].
A list of the Factory Functions will be printed. After printing the unit will return to standby.
3.13.2 LED Test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “LED Test”.
2. Press [Enter].
Pressing <Start>, all green LEDs will turn on.

Pressing <Start> again, all red LEDs will turn on.
Pressing <Start> the third time, all LEDs will turn on.
3. Press <Stop> to exit the LED test mode.
3-151
3.13.3 LCD Test
This mode displays two test patterns in LCD.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “LCD Test”.
2. Press [Enter].
Pressing <Start>, all dots will turn on.
Next pressing <Start>, all dots will turn off.
Next pressing <Start>, characters will be displayed.
3. Press <Stop> to exit the LCD test mode.
3-152
3.13.4 Panel Key Test
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Panel Test”.
2. Press [Enter].
3. As each button on the keypad is pressed, a representative name as show in the following table will be dis-
played.
Key Indication in LCD Key Indication in LCD
ENERGY SAVE EnergySave Numeric keys 0 through Tenkey 1 to #
#
COPY Copy START Start
FAX Fax STOP Stop
SCAN Scanner INTERRUPT Interrupt
CONTRAST LCD_Contrast SPEED DIAL Anykey 1
FAX CANCEL / JOB Fax Stop/Conf On-hook Anykey 2
CONFIRM.
Panel key 1~4 Function 1~4 TTI Anykey 3
ONLINE Online LIST Anykey 4
VOICE GUIDANCE Voice guidance MACRO Reg Key macro
RESET Reset M1~ M3 key macro 1 ~ 3
MENU Menu One-touch dial 1 ~ 56 Speed dial 1 ~ 56
4. Press <Stop> twice to cancel the key panel test.
3.13.5 SRAM Check

This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time, TTI,
etc are stored.
Note: When this test is executed, the unit will perform an All RAM Clear.
The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique
switches to factory defaults.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “SRAM Check”.

2. Press [Enter].
3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad, then press <Start>. The HEX code is written to, then
read from memory. After that, the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. Then the machine will return
to factory function. To enter A, B, C, D, E and F, see table below.
A B C D E F
Seped dial Macro 01 02 On-hook M1
The data are written to, then read from each address. The results are shown in the display. If the read/
write test is successful, the display will show “OK”.
If some portion of the read/write test fails, the display will show “NG” with the address and the data name.
4. Upon completion, the machine returns to the test mode.
3-153
3.13.6 DRAM Check
This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory.
Note: W
hen this test is performed, an All DRAM Clear will be performed by the unit. The All RAM clear
erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique switches to
factory defaults.
This is a read/write test that requires a few moments to complete.
Note: Perform a DRAM test whenever a memory upgrade is added to the unit.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “DRAM Check”.

2. Press [Enter].
3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one-touch key [01] to [06], then press <Start>.
4. Depending on the amount of DRAM in the unit, press <0>, <1> or <2> on the numeric keypad.
Please refer to the following table:
Note: Usually, press <0>.
Press Check area

0 All DRAMs
1 The standard memory on the main control board
2 The memory on the Optional Memory PCB
5. Press <Start>.
The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
For example, if the check area is “0” and a 64MB expansion memory is attached, you will see:
The numbers displayed OK/NG means the following area
Number Check area

1 The standard memory on the main control board
2 The memory on the attached 32MB Memory PCB
or
The first half of the memory on the 64MB Optional Memory PCB
3 The second half of the memory on the 64MB Optional Memory PCB
6. Press <Reset> to exit the test mode.
3.13.7 RTC(real time clock) Test

3-154
3.13.8 Page memory check
When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Page Memory check”.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Select the desired checking area and press [Enter].

4. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (page 3-165), and then go back to step 1.
5. Press [Close] to exit the test mode.
3.13.9 ATDC adjustment

This mode adjusts the value of data read by the ATDC Sensor. When a reused drum is set to a different
machine or in cased that the machine cannot memory the value, the former value must be inputted manually
using this mode.
Note: Before replacing the drum to other machine or replacing the PCB Main, first use this mode to write
down the current ATDC value and the drum life time.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “ATDC adjustment”.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Select “ASTD” and press [Enter].

4. Enter the ASTD value, and press [Enter].
5. Select “DeltaVCONT” and press [Enter].

6. Enter the DeltaVCONT value, and press [Enter].
7. Select “Drum Life Time” and press [Enter].

8. Enter the drum life time, and press [Enter].
9. Press [Close] to exit the mode.

3-155
3.13.10 Generate bell test
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Generate Bell Test”.
2. Press [Enter].
3. The bell starts ringing.
4. Press <Stop> to stop.
3.13.11 Toner supply mode

This mode forces to supply the toner to the prescribed standard ratio, when it goes down for an
unexpected reason.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Toner supply mode”.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Select “ON” to activate this mode and press [Enter].
3.13.12 Lamp measurement

3.13.13 Thermistor Temperature Log

You can see and print 100 log of Thermistor temperature and Heater On/Off.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Thermistor Temperature Log”.
2. Press [Enter].
See the list below what the acronyms stand for.
3. To scroll the screen, press < >.

4. When you press <Start> the log will be printed.
5. Press <Reset> to go back to the test mode.
Explanation for the LCD and list:
Acronym
Meaning Explanation
LCD List
G TG Target Temperature 125˚C: Standby
105˚C: Warm up starts
125˚C: Warm up ends
170˚C: Paper pickup
175˚C: Pringint
P TP Thermistor Temperature The temperature of the thermistor. (˚C)
T HT Heater Whether the heater is On or Off.
M TM General Time Internal time counter (10ms/count)
3-156
3.14 Line Tests
This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included are relay
tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.
3.14.1 Relay Test

This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.

2. Select the line you want to test and press [Enter].
You can only test line1.
3. Select “Relay Test” and press [Enter].
4. Select the relay you want to test and press [Enter]. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
OFHK_ON OFHK_ON H_ON H_OFF

L_ON L_OFF CONT24_ON CONT24_OFF
RI_ON RI_OFF Hook key
5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.
3-157
3.14.2 Tonal Signal Test
The tonal signal test permits the unit’s output tones to be monitored.
Note:To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line
jack.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
3. Select “Tonal” and press [Enter].
4. Select your desired tonal signal test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below.

Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change.
Signal Signal
None (stop signal) V17_2400_7200_W1_B4
400 Hz tone V17_2400_7200_W0_B1
600 Hz tone V17_2400_7200_W4_B1
1100 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B0
1300 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B1
2100 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B4
3000 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W0_B1
3400 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W4_B1
FSK WHITE V17_2400_12000_W1_B0
FSK BLACK V17_2400_12000_W1_B1
FSK _W1_B1 V17_2400_12000_W1_B4
V27_1200_2400 V17_2400_12000_W0_B1
V27_1600_4800 V17_2400_12000_W4_B1
V29_2400_7200 V17_2400_14400_W1_B0
V29_2400_9600 V17_2400_14400_W1_B1
V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 V17_2400_14400_W1_B4
V17_2400_7200_W1_B1 V17_2400_14400_W0_B1
V17_2400_14400_W4_B1
Signal
V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600
V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400
V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800
V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200
V34_34290_4800 ~ 33600
VOICE
MELODY
GRBT
5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.

3-158
3.14.3 DTMF Output Test
The DTMF output test permits the unit’s DTMF tones to be monitored.
Note:To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.

3. Select “DTMF” and press [Enter].
4. Select your desired tonal DTMF tone and press [Enter]. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below.

Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change.
Display Signal Display Signal
0 DTMF0 (941 Hz ＋ 1336 Hz) ROW1 ROW1 (697 Hz)
4 DTMF4 (770 Hz ＋ 1209 Hz) COL1 COL1 (1209 Hz)
8 DTMF8 (852 Hz ＋ 1336 Hz)
9 DTMF9 (852 Hz ＋ 1477 Hz)
AST DTMF6* (941 Hz ＋ 1209 Hz)
SHARP DTMF# (941 Hz ＋ 1477 Hz)
5. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press <Stop>.

6. To select another DTMF tone, repeat steps 4-5.
Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press [Close] to exit the DTMF output test mode under not tests.
3-159
3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode
Important: The fax machine is shipped with mirror carriage locking plate for protecting the machine’
s mirror carriage during shipping. When installing the fax, slide the scanner locking knob
back to its unlocking position. Then turn the power on and perform the following:
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4>.
2. Select “Off” and press [Enter].
Important: If reshipping, turn this mode on to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Then
power off and slide the locking knob to its mirror carriage locking position.
3-160
3.16 Consumable order sheet
When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machine
prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.
Ľ ľĿ ․‣
1 Dealer’s fax number 13 Dealer’s telephone number

2 Customer’s name 14 Dealer’s fax number
3 Customer’s address 15 Comments
4 Customer’s account 16 Customaers siganuture
5 Serial number of the unit 17 Block letter of the signature
6 Customer’s telephone number 18 Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds)
7 Customer’s fax number registered by Initial 19 Drum life time
setting mode
8 Order item 20 Drum used percentage
9 Description of the order item 21 Total print pages
10 Quantity of the order item 22 Number of pirnted pages after toner or

drum was replaced
11 Dealer’s name 23 ROM version
12 Dealer’s code
3-161
3.16.1 Set consumable order sheet
1. Clear the junk data, if necessary (see “Clear consumable order sheet,” page 3-164).
2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
3. Select “Consumable Order Sheet” and press [Enter].
4. Press “Dealer Name” and press [Enter].

Enter the Dealer’s name. The code may be up to 30 characters in length.
5. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s name.

6. Select “Dealer Tel No” and press [Enter].
Enter the distributor’s telephone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
To enter the numbers, use the numeric keypad.
7. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s telephone number.

8. Select “Dealer Fax No” and press [Enter].
Enter the dealer’s fax number. The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length.
9. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s fax number.

10. Select “Cust Account #” and press [Enter].
Enter the customer’s account number. The customer’s account number may be up to 10 characters
in length.
11. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s code.
3-162
12. Select “Cust Name” and press [Enter].
Enter the customer’s account number. The customer’s account number may be up to 30 characters
in length.
13. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s name.

14. Select “Address 1” and press [Enter].
Enter the customer’s address for the upper row. The customer’s address may be up to 14 charac-
ters in length.
15. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s address for the upper row.
16. Select “Address 2” and press [Enter].
Enter the customer’s address for the lower row. The customer’s address may be up to 14 charac-
ters in length.
17. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s address for the lower row.
18. Select “Cust Tel”.
Enter the customer’s phone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
19. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s phone number.

20. Select “Unit Serial #” and press [Enter].
Enter the MFP’s serial number. The number may be up to 18 characters in length.
21. Press [Enter] to save the MFP’s serial number.
3-163
22. Select “Order Sheet Setting” and press [Enter].
Determine if the machine prints or transmits the consumable order sheet when the printer consum-
able is near end of its designed life.
If “OFF” is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even
though the printer consumable is near end of its designed life.
23. Press [Enter] save the setting.

24. Press [Close] to go back to the Consumable Orders Sheet mode.
3.16.2 Clear consumable order sheet

The consumable order sheet keeps several items, these are not clear the all RAM clear function
(Menu *, 0, 3). To clear the information of consumable order sheet:
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2. Select “Clear Order Sheet” and press [Enter].
3. To clear the information of consumable order sheet, press [Yes].

To finish the operation without clearing, press [No].
3.16.3 Print consumable order sheet

To check the customer’s information has been registered correctly, print the consumable order sheet.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2. Select “Order Sheet List” and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes].
3-164
3.17 DRAM Clear
Note: Perform a DRAM clear whenever a memory upgrade is installed to the unit or the DRAM is
replaced.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6>.
2. Press [Yes]. The DRAM will be cleared.

3. After clearing, turn the power OFF and ON.
3.18 Clear Life Monitor

The life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, printed, and transmitted, along with the drum
replacement count and total pages printed on the current drum. This mode clears these counters.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <7>.
2. Press [Yes]. The counters will be reset.

3.19 Clear Optional Data

This mode clears all data and all activity journals for Printer controller.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <8>.
2. Press [Yes]. The optional data will be reset.

3-165
3.20 Set Service Code
This is the code to protect the life monitor clear operation. If it is not necessary to protect to the life
monitor clear operation, abort this operation without entering the service code.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <9>.
2. Your next mode depends on whether you’re creating or modifying the service code:
• If creating --- Go to step 3.
• If modifying --- Use the numeric keypad to enter the proper service code and press [Enter]. If
you enter an invalid code, the fax will reject the attempt and abort this operation.
3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit service code.
4. Press [Enter].
Note: To turn off the service code and return to normal life monitor clear (not protected), change the
code to 0000 by repeating steps 1-4 and entering 0000 in step 3.
3-166
3.21 Life monitor maintenance
When you replace the main control PCB, you should register the previous several counter values of
the life monitor.
1. Before updating the software or replacing the main control PCB, write down the counter values of
the life monitor.
2. To confirm the life monitor, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, <Enter>. Then scroll down the list. (See
“3.11.1 Life Monitor,” page 3-145.)
3. After you write down the counter values of the life monitor, update the software or replace the main
control PCB.
4. Then, press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <0>.
5. Select “Printed pages” and press [Enter].
6. Enter previous values of the printed pages using the current toner cartridge, then press [Enter].
7. Select “# of Printed Page after warning” and press [Enter].
8. Enter previous value of the drum replaced count, then press [Enter].
9. Select “Drum Life” and press [Enter].
10. Enter previous value of the drum life, then press [Enter].
11. Select “Drum Life pages”, and press [Enter].
12. Enter previous value of the drum life pages, then press [Enter].
13. Select “Drum Replaced Count”, and press [Enter].
3-167
14. Enter previous value of the drum replaced count, and press [Enter].
15. Select “Toner Replaced Count”, and press [Enter].
16. Enter previous value of the toner replaced count, then press [Enter].
17. Select “Fuser Replaced Count”, and press [Enter].
18. Enter previous value of the fuser replaced count, then press [Enter].
19. Select “Fuser Life”, and press [Enter].
20. Enter previous value of the fuser life, then press [Enter].
21. Select “Transfer Rplcd Count”, and press [Enter].
22. Enter previous value of the transfer roller replaced count, then press [Enter].
23. Select “Transfer Life”, and press [Enter].
24. Enter previous value of the transfer roller life, then press [Enter].
25. Press <Reset> to go to the standby screen.
3-168
3.22 Sensor input test
This mode can confirm the sensor status. When the sensor operates, the value next to sensor name
changes 0 to 1. For example, when open the 1st paper cassette, the CAS1:0 change to CAS1: 1.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2>.
2. Press < > or < > to display the desired sensor.

Code Status Code Status
DS1 0: No document DS2 0: No document
1: Document existing 1: Document existing
DRS Sensor for resist EXIT*1 Switchback sensor for RADF
0: No document 0: No
1: Document existing 1: Yes
DW1 Document width detection DL1 Document Length Sensor for
DW2 DW1 DW2 Width ADF
0 0 Minimum 0: No document
1: Document existing
1 0 A4
0 1 A3
1 1 B4
DL2 *1
Document Length Sensor for LAST*1 0: No document on the tray
ADF 1: Document on the tray
0: No document
TXIL 0: Scanner cover is close
1: Scanner cover is open
APS 0: Platen cover is open BIS Start scanning the document
1: Platen cover is closed on FBS
0: On
1: Off
HS 0: Mirror is other than the BSS Document Length Sensor for
(Home Sensor) home position FBS
1: Mirror in the home position 0: No document
PSS 0: No paper PDS Paper sensor for exit area
1: Detect paper 0: No paper
1: Detect paper
SWBK Switchback sensor for printer DUP Duplex sensor
0: No 0: No
1: Yes 1: Yes
FEED2 Second cassette feed sensor FEED3 Third cassette feed sensor
0: No 0: No
1: Yes 1: Yes
FEED4 Third cassette feed sensor DUPU Duplex unit detection
0: No 0: No duplex unit
1: Yes 1: Duplex unit
DSW1 Drum sensor
0: Used
1: New
CART Cartridge sensor DEV Developing unit detection
0: No cartridge 0: No unit
1: Cardtridge 1: Developing unit
LOCK_P Power unit fan lock LOCK_F Fusing unit fan lock
0: Turning 0: Turning
1: Locked 1: Locked
3-169
Code Status Code Status
LOCK1M Main motor lock LOCK2M Second motor lock
0: Turning 0: Turning
1: Locked 1: Locked
HYDRO Shows the humidity outside THRM Shows the temperature
the machine outside the machine
VCON Shows the Anst value and ATDC Shows the ATDC value of
Vcont value of toner the sensor
TOS Toner in toner buffer TEMP Show the internal
0: Yes temperature of heat roller.
1: No
PES Paper Empty Sensor PSIZE Paper size for 1st cassette
0: Detect paper is 1st 1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER
cassette 4:A4 5:F4 6:A3
1: No paper in 1st cassette 8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
J1_OP 1st cassette side cover PES2 0: Detect paper is 2nd
0: Closed cassette
1: Open 1: No paper in 2nd cassette
PSIZE2 Paper size for 2nd cassette J2_OP 2nd cassette side cover
1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER 0: Closed
4:A4 5:F4 6:A3 1: Open
8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
PES3 0: Detect paper is 3rd PSIZE3 Paper size for 3rd cassette
cassette 1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER
0: No paper in 3rd cassette 4:A4 5:F4 6:A3
8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
J3_OP 3rd cassette side cover
0: Closed
1: Open
PES4 0: Detect paper is 4th cassette PSIZE4 Paper size for 3rd cassette
1: No paper in 4th cassette 1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER
4:A4 5:F4 6:A3
8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
J4_OP 4th cassette side cover PES_BS 0: Detect paper on bypass
0: Closed tray
1: Open 1: No paper on bypass tray
PSIZEM Paper size for bypass tray FR_OP Front cover
0:A4R 1:A4 2:B5R 3:B5 4:A5R 0: Closed
5:A5 6:OTHER 1: Open
7:POSTCARD 8:A3 9:B4
LFTUP1 1st cassette liftup sensor LFTUP2 2nd cassette liftup sensor
0: No 0: No
1: Yes 1: Yes
LFETUP3 3rd cassette liftup sensor
0: No
1: Yes
LEFTUP4 4th cassette liftup sensor
0: No
1: Yes
*1 : Displayed only on MFX-2725, MFX-2225.
3-170
Note: CAS2, JAM2 and PES2 do not change, when there is no second cassette attached.
SWBK does not change, when the machine has no duplex printing unit.
We have described the sensors of the RADF model in section 2 by names begining with “PI”.
See the table below which sensor correspond to which.
Display The sensor names in section 2
TXIL PI10
DS1 PI11
DS2 PI7
DRS PI8
DW1 PI2
DW2 PI1
DL1 PI4
DL2 PI5
- PI6
- PI3
3. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.
3-171
3.23 Printer diagnostic mode
This mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <3>.
2. Press < > or < > to select the device you want to set to ON.
Fan :Turns the cooling fan motor
Rx Motor :Turns the Rx motor
Lamp :Turns the lamp on
Clutch 1 :Turns the clutch of 1st cassette
Clutch 2 :Turns the clutch of 2nd cassette
Clutch 3 :Turns the clutch of 3rd cassette
Clutch 4 :Turns the clutch of 4th cassette
R Clutch :Turns the clutch of the resist roller
Clutch M :Turns the clutch of the bypass tray
Dup Clutch :Turns the duplex clutch
ALL OFF :Turns the all device to off
3. Press [Enter].
4. Press [Enter] again to exit.
3-172
3.24 Network service mode
This mode provides the following four items:
• Display the sum-check of internet fax board
• Delete the Manager (Admisitrator)
• All clear the registered parameters of the optional Internet fax board
3.24.1 Display the server sum-check

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2. ��
Select “Show��
Server Sumcheck” and press [Enter].
3. Press [Close] to close the server sumcheck display.
3.24.2 Delete Manager

Clear the administrator information, when the administrator passward is missing and no one can
manage the network setting.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2. ��
Select “Delete Manager��
” and press [Enter].
3. ��
Press [Yes].
��
3-173
3.24.3 All clear the registered parameters of the network board
You can clear all the data of network settings like IP address, Subnet Mask or Default Gateway.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2. Select “Server data clear” and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The information will be cleared.
3.25 Flash Rom Sum Check

This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <9>.
2. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.
3.26 Printer registration adjustment

This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source.
For more detail, see “5.3 Adjustment” in section 5.
3-174
3.27 Set Service Report
3.27.1 Set the service report
If using this feature, you should be enter following items:
• Report location 1 and 2 – Where to send the service report.
• P
eriod – The report can be send either once in a determined month(s) or once in a month on
a determined date and time.
1. Press <Menu>,
��
<*>, <4>, <2>.
2. Select “Setting” and press [Enter].

3. Select “Send Service Report” and press [Enter].
3. To activate the Service Report mode, select “On” and press [Enter].
4. Now you can enter the detail for the report.

Press “Report Location 1” and press [Enter].
5. To send the service report to the customer service, select “On” and press [Enter].
6. Enter the fax number where to send the report. Press [Enter].
3-175
7. Press “Report Location 2” to enter another location. Otherwise, skip to step 9.
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter the location.

9. Select “Interval Months” and press [Enter].
10. Enter the interval for service report auto transmission from 1 to 12 months and press [Enter].
11. Press <Reset> to go back to standby mode.
3.27.2 Clear service report

To clear the information of service report:
1. Press <Menu>,
��
<*>, <4>, <2>.
2. Select “Delete” and press [Enter].
3. To clear the information of service report setting, select “yes” and press [Enter].
To finish the operation without clearing, select “No” and press [Enter].
3-176
3.28 Reset Printer Trouble
This mode clears the service call.
Note: Perform this operation after solved the trouble.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <5>.
2. Press [Yes].
3.29 Cleaning mode

This mode rotate the feed roller and registration roller automatically so that you can clean the surface
of them.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <6>.
2. To rotate the feed roller, select “Feed Roller ON” and press [Enter].
3. Open the feeder cover and clean the feed roller.
To stop rotating the roller, select “Feed Roller OFF” and press [Enter].
4. To rotate the pickup roller, select “Pickup Roller ON” and press [Enter].
5. Clean the pickup roller. The pickup roller is able to clean without opening the feeder cover.
To stop rotating the roller, select “Pickup Roller OFF” and press [Enter].
3.30 Voice test

This mode makes it possible to hear all the voice guidance in order.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <7>.
2. The voice guidance comes from the speaker one after another.
3. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode.
3-177
3.31 Network Switch
When an e-mail address is registered as the archive destination, you can set the reroute function on
or off. (For this MFP, only this function is available in the network switch.)
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <1>.
2. Select “Set Network Switch” and press [Enter].
3. Press <0>, <0>, <7>, and then [Enter].
4. Move to the cursor to the right switch and change it either to “0” or “1” using the numeric key.
(0 is for “Off”. 1 is for “On”. The default setting is 0, on.)
5. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
3.32 Security function maintenance

The security function is available regardless of the registered protect passcode.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <2>.
2. Select the desired function and press [Enter].

3. Edit the function and press [Enter].
3-178
3.33 Measuring the black ratio
The black ratio of the scanned document can be measured. The maximum document size is A3 (600
dpi).
1. Set the document to measure.
2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <4>.
3. Press [Yes].
4. When the measure is finished, the black ratio will be displayed on the LCD.
3.34 Service function menu

All the field service program modes are available from the menu.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <7>, <7>.
2. Select the mode you want to enter and press [Yes].

See this chapter how to operate each service function.
3-179
3.35 Quick Initial settings
At installation of this machine, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures.
You can do the following setting with continuously.
1. Initial settings
2. Consumable order sheet settings
3. Service Report settings.
Note: Before starting the installation settings, clear the memory by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>,
[Enter].
Entering initial settings

1. To start Initial setting mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <9>. The LCD shows:
2. Follow the display and enter the items.

See the Use’s Guide for detailed instructions.
3. After you have entered all the setting, press [Close].
The LCD now shows the Consumable order sheet setting menu.
• T
o set, clear or print the consumable order sheet, see page 3-161, "3.16 Consumable order
sheet" how to operate these functions.
4. After you have entered all the setting, press [Close].
The LCD now shows the service report setting menu.
• T
o skip to the service report settings, press [Close]. See page 3-175, "3.27 Set Service
Report" how to operate the functions.
5. Press [Close] to go back to the standby screen.
3-180
3.36 Update the software
The software on the MFP are written on a flash ROM. Use a compact flash memory card (CF), to
update the software. The are two ways to update the software:
· Automatic ROM update
· Manual ROM update
3.36.1 Before updating the flash ROM
· The machine does not detect the CF memory card when you insert it while power on. A malfunction
may occur.
Turn the MFP to OFF before inserting the CF memory card, and then turn the machine to on.
Do not pull out the CF memory card while overwriting, because the system may get unstable.
· A CF memory card is not available for both automatic and manual update.
Both “Boot folder” and “ROM folder” can exist on one CF memory card, however either the boot or

the ROM folder can hold an update ROM file.
· You can not update the machine while it is in use or the memory is in use.
Be sure that the machine is not in use, and the remaining memory is 100% before updating the

ROM.
· When you perform the automatic ROM update, be sure the power is charged enough.
· Do not turn the power off during updating.

Doing this will not recover the machine. In case the machine is unable to recover, replace the main

control PCB.
3-181
3.36.2 Automatic ROM update
The machine will update the ROM automaticary using the ROM date on the CF memory card.
To perform the ROM update, the follwing conditions should all be filled:
• One ROM data file is save on “\Boot” folder.
• “Model code of machine ROM data *1” matches with “Model code on the CF memory card *1”.
• “Model name of the machine ROM data” matches with “Model name on the CF memory card”.
• “Distribution country of the machine ROM data” matches with “Distribution country name on the CF
memory card”.
• “ROM version of the machine” differs with “ROM version on the CF memory card”.
*1 : The model code for MFX-2725, MFX-2700, MFX-2225 and MFX-2200 are “DB2”.
Operation
1. Power off the machine.
2. Open the access cover, and insert the CF memory card to the main control PCB.
CF
3. Turn the machine to on. The ROM update starts.

4. When the conditions are filled, the message bellow will be displayed on the LCD and the ROM data
on the CF memory card will be copied on the SDRAM. While the data is copied, the ROM version
and the coping data volume will be displayed. (The transferring value displayed goes from 0 KB to
the data size on the ROM)
CF ROM Upgrade
MainBoardROM Ver. 2725 EUR A2A0A0 DB2
Receiving 4092KB
Do not remove CF card
(Sample)
5. When copy is finished, the update of flash ROM begins.

While updating the flash ROM, the panel LEDs will turned on in order. When the ROM update is
finished, the machine reboots automatically.
6. When the machine is rebooted check the ROM version.
(Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, and select “Life Monitor” then [Enter].)
8. Pull out the CF memory card. Close the access cover.
9. Turn on the machine.
3-182
3.36.3 Manual ROM update
You can choose the ROM data on the CF memory card for Main control board or OP550.
To perform the ROM update all the following conditions should be filled:
For main control board
• One or more ROM data files are saved on “\ROM\(model code)*1” folder.
• “Model code of machine ROM data *1” matches with “Model code on the CF memory card *1”.
• No ROM data with the same model code is saved on “\Boot” folder.
*1 : The model code for MFX-2725, MFX-2700, MFX-2225 and MFX-2200 are “DB2”.
For PCL print (OP550) board

• One or more ROM data files are saved on “\ROM\OP500” folder.
• “Model name of the machine ROM data” matches with “Model name on the CF memory card”.
The ROM is able to overwrite with a new, old or same version ROM. The display shows to which
version the CF memory card is overwriting the machine. However the machine does not judge the
version.
Operation
2. Open the access cover, and insert the CF memory card to the main control PCB.
CF
3. Turn the machine to on. The ROM update starts.

4. Be sure that the machine is in standby mode and press <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <6>.
5. Select the PCB board to update and press [Enter].
6. If there are many ROM versions saved on the card, choose to which version to update, and press
[Enter].
3-183
7. Confirm the ROM version and press [Enter].
If the model code of the machine ROM and the model code of the CF memory card matches the
ROM update starts.
CF ROM Upgrade
File name 2725__A2AA0 EUR
[Close] [Enter]
8. When the copy is finished, Sum Check will be displayed.

CF ROM Upgrade
Sum Check
16BIT[N] : 41BD
[Close] [Enter]
9. When you updating the ROM of the Main control board, press [Update] to start to update the flash
ROM.
While updating the flash ROM, the panel LEDs will turned on in order. When the ROM update is
finished, the machine reboots automatically.
When you updating the ROM of the OP550, pressing [Update] will start to copy the ROM date from
the machine SDRAM to PCL print board.
While the data is copied, the ROM version and the coping data volume will be displayed. (The
transferring value displayed goes from 0 KB to the data size on the ROM)
When the copy is over, the PCL print board updates the ROM.
When the ROM update is finished, the machine reboots automatically.
10. When the machine is rebooted check the ROM version.

(Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, and select “Life Monitor” then [Enter].)
12. Pull out the CF memory card. Close the access cover.
13. Turn on the machine.
Improtant: DO NOT power off the machine while updating. Doing this will not recover the machine. In
case the machine is unable to recover, replace the main control PCB.
When you try to perform ROM update while the SDRAM is in use (out-of-paper-reception etc.), the
following message will be displayed and the machine reboots without updating the ROM.
CF ROM Upgrade
Memory in use
3-184
3.36.4 How to save the ROM data on the CF memory card
For manual ROM update
Main control boad ROM

• Create a folder "\ROM\(oder cord)", save the ROM data on that root directory.
• One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.
• No "\Boot" folder should be saved in the root directory.
3-185
PCL ROM
• Create a folder "\ROM\OP500", save the ROM data on that root directory..
• One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.
3-186
For automatic ROM update
• Create "\Boot" folder and save just one ROM data on that root directory.
3-187
4 Troubleshooting Procedures
4.1 Troubleshooting Outline
Before troubleshooting a unit check the following:
• Is the power cord correctly connected to the machine?
• Are the telephone handset and the telephone line cord connected correctly?
• Is the telephone dial type set correctly?
• Is there paper in the paper cassette?
• Are the toner and drum cartridges set correctly?
• Are all covers closed correctly?
Before removing any portions of the machine or making any adjustments be sure the power
cord is disconnected from the unit. Check the following:
• The power source should be rated according to unit specifications.
• The unit should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages
may vary.
• The unit should be installed on a flat, level surface.
• The ambient temperature and relative humidity surrounding the unit should be 10°C to 32°C (50°F
to 89.6°F) at 20% to 80% humidity with no condensation.
• The unit should be located in a well ventilate area.
• The unit should receive necessary cleaning and maintenance.
The unit should be installed:

• Away from heat sources and heating or cooling vents.
• Away from water heaters, steam generators, humidifiers or other areas of high humidity.
• Away from dusty areas.
• Away from areas where chemical fumes or gasses are generated or may collect.
• Away from areas exposed to direct sunlight.
Check the consumable:

• Verify that the recording paper supply is adequate and that it conforms to the type specified for use
in the machine.
• Verify that the recording paper has been stored away from moisture and damp areas.
• Verify that the recording paper has not been damaged in any way.
4.2 Mirror Carriage Error

Symptom: The mirror carriage doesn’t move.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify that the scanner unit locking pins have been released. Release the scanner unit locking pins
if they are not released. Then press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4> to turn off the mirror carriage carry
mode.
2. Verify that the timing belt is not out of joint.
3. Check the operation of HOME sensor at connector P143, on the Scanner PCB.
4-1
4.3 Recording Paper Jam
After removing the jammed paper, please close the top cover once.
Mechanical errors
Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure
Jam in the paper The selected paper is not suitable. Recommend customer to use suitable paper.
supply area
Wrinkled /bent /torn paper has been Replace it with the new paper.
set in the cassette.
Paper is not loaded properly. Reload the paper by using the paper guides prop-
erly.
* The cassette has not been installed Instruct the user how to set the paper settings
into the machine properly properly.
* The side paper guides have not been
slid up against the edges of paper
properly.
* The paper cassette setting is wrong.
Faulty movement of some cassette Check each movement of a cassette part.

parts. Replace the faulty part.
Paper is stuck in the recording area. Remove the stuck paper.
The paper feed roller is worn out. Replace the roller.
Jam in the feed Paper is stuck in the feed area. Remove the jammed paper.
area
Jam in the fuser Paper is stuck in the fuser or paper Remove the jammed paper.
or the paper exit exit area.
area
The fuser roller is not clean. Replace the fuser roller.
Electrical errors
Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure
Jam in the feed The paper supply electromagnetic * Check the wiring.
area clutch does not work. * Replace the paper supply electromagnetic clutch.
“Please close the * Replace the PRT PCB.
blinking cover.” * Replace the Main PCB.
The paper supply sensor (PSS) does Check that the wiring and actuator are working
not work. properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS or
Main PCB.
Jam in the feed The malfunction of the PPS. Check that the wiring and actuator are working
area properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS or
“Please close the Main PCB.
blinking cover.”
Jam in the feed The paper size is not correct. Check that the paper, paper size settings, sensor,
area and wiring (including the operation.) Replace the
“Check paper PRT PCB.
size.....”
Jam in the fuser The paper discharge sensor (PDS) Check that the wiring and actuator are working
or paper exit does not work. properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PDS or
area Scanner PCB.
4-2
4.4 Document Feeder Jam
ADF/RADF section
Mechanical Errors
Symptom Possible Cause Countermeasure
While The ADF/RADF does not The pickup roller is dirty or worn Clean the roller.
feeding a feed the document. out. Replace the roller.
document
The power of the separation Adjust the separation pressure.
roller is getting decrease. The Clean the roller.
separation pressure does not
match the paper source.
The motor is not rotating. Replace the motor, the ADF PCB
or the scanner PCB.
While The feeder stops the feed- The malfunction of the sensor.. Replace the sensor.
scanning ing job while the document
a docu- is taken into the feeder. The motor power is not working Replace the motor, the ADF PCB
ment properly. or the scanner PCB.
The roller is dirty. Replace the roller.
The roller is worn out. Replace the roller.
The document is stuck and A foreign object entered the Remove the object.
gets damaged while taken feed area.
into the feeder.
The paper quality is not acceptable. Recommend the customer to use
The paper shape is not acceptable. the book scanner.
Sensor Malfunctions
While No beep sound when you DS1 or PI11(EMPTY) sensor 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to
feeding a place the document�
��. defect display the sensor job confirma-
document (The beep sound volume tion mode.
setting could be OFF.) 1) C onfirm the LCD indication
changes by moving the DS1
sensor.
0: No document / 1: Document
2) If the does not change, replace
the DS1 sensor or the PI11
(EMPTY) sensor.
3) Replace the sensor harness.
4) Replace the ADF PCB.
5) R eplace the harness between
the scanner and the ADF PCB.
6) Replace the scanner PCB.
the scanner PCB and the Main
PCB.
APS sensor defect 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to

display the sensor job confirma-
tion mode.
1) C onfirm that the LCD indication
changes by opening and closing
the book cover.
0: Cover Open / 1: Document
2) If the LCD indication does not
change, replace the APS sensor.
the scanner PCB and the Main
PCB.
* The FBS does not work correctly while displaying the ADF sensor status.
Please do not open or close the FBS cover while displaying the ADF sensor status.
4-3
While feed- The machine feeds DRS or PI8(REG) 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the
ing a docu- the document through sensor defect sensor job confirmation mode.
ment the ADF/RADF without 1) C onfirm that the LCD indication changes by
scanning. opening the ADF cover and pressing the filler.
0: No document /1: Document
2) If the display indication does not change,
replace the DRS PI8(REG) sensor.
6) R eplace the harness between the ADF PCB
and scanner PCB.
7) R eplace the harness between the scanner
PCB and Main PCB.
DS2 or PI7(READ) 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the

sensor defect sensor job confirmation mode.
1) C onfirm that the LCD indication changes by
While The scan starting and opening the ADF cover and inserting the docu-
scanning a ending area are not ment from above.
document correct. 0: No document /1: Document
2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace
the DRS or PI7(READ) sensor.
and scanner PCB.
PCB and Main PCB.
The scanning size is not DW1 or PI2(SIZE_ 0) P

ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the
correct. W1), or DW2 or sensor job confirmation mode.
PI1(SIZE_W2) 1) C
onfirm that the LCD indication changes by
sensor defect moving the document guides.
Width DW1 DW2
Minimum 0 0
A4 1 0
A3 0 1
B4 1 1
the DW1 or PI2(SIZE_W1), or the DW2 or
PI1(SIZE_W2) sensor.
4) Replace the ADF PCB .
and scanner PCB�.
PCB and the Main PCB.
While a The LCD shows a warn- DS1 Check “DS1 or PI11(EMPTY) sensor defect” first,
document ing while a document PI11(EMPTY), or then “DS2 or PI7(READ) sensor defect”.
exits exits after scanning. DS2 or PI7(READ)
sensor defect
The LCD shows a warn-
ing after a document
exits.
4-4
Others The message, “Please TXIL or 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the
close the blinking cover.” PI10(COVER) sen- sensor job confirmation mode.
appear on the LCD. sor defect 1) C onfirm that the LCD indication changes by
opening and closing the ADF cover.
The blinking cover: The 0: Cover Open / 1: Cover Close
ADF cover 2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace
the TXIL or PI10(COVER) sensor.
and scanner PCB
The length of the DL1 or PI4(SIZE_ 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the
document has not been L1), or DL2 or sensor job confirmation mode.
scanned properly. PI5(SIZE_L2) sen- 1) C onfirm that the LCD indication changes by
sor defect placing B4 or A3 document on the document
tray.
the DL1 or PI4(SIZE_L1), or DL2 or PI5(SIZE_
L2) sensor.
6) R eplace the harness between the ADF and
scanner.
4-5
FBS section
Mecannical Errors
An unusual noise occurs. The belt has not been firmly inserted Check the belt.
into the belt holder.
The FBS motor gear is interfering with Check the interfering area
the film.
The motor actuation belt is getting too Check the timing belt
slack.
Sensor Malfunctions
While placing The docu- BIS sensor defect 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to
a document ment size display the sensor job confirmation
can not be mode.
scanned 1) C onfirm that the LCD indication
properly. changes by opening and closing the
book cover.
0: Cover Open / 1: Cover Close
2) If the LCD indication does not change,
replace the BIS sensor.
5) R eplace the harness between the
scanner PCB and the Main PCB.
BSS sensor defect 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to

display the sensor job confirmation
mode.
1) C onfirm that the LCD indication
changes by placing A3 on the book
scanner area.
replace the BSS sensor.
While scan- The lamp is Lamp defect Replace it.

ning a docu- not illumi-
ment nated. Lamp FPC defect Replace it.
Lamp inverter defect Replace it
Harness for inverter controller defect Replace it.
Scanner PCB defect Replace it.
The mirror HS sensor defect 0) P ress <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2> to

carriage is display the sensor job confirmation
touching the mode.
home side 1) C onfirm that the LCD indication
(on the left changes by opening and closing the
toward the book cover.
front) 0: N ot home position (The cover has
been opened.)
1: H ome position (The cover has been
closed.)
replace the HS sensor.
4-6
While scan- The mirror FBS motor defect Replace it.

ning a docu- carriage
ment does not Scanner PCB defect Replace it.
work.
4-7
4.5 Service Call Error
The errors messages and an explanation of each are outlined below.
Code��
��
Error Message
04: Second Rx motor
��
Error
06: Cassette Liftup Error (First cassette)
07: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional second cassette)
08: Rx motor
��
Error
0B: ��
��
Fan Error
0D: Temperature / Humid Sensor Error
0E: Fan Control Thermistor Error)
11: ATDC Error (Vcont value abnormal error)
12: ATDC Error (Astd value abnormal error)
15: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional third cassette)
16: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional fourth cassette)
18: ��
��
Fuser Error
1E: ��
��
Drum fuse Error
46: ATDC Error (Initialize time-up error)
47: ATDC Error (Disconnection error)
49: ATDC Error (Toner density control time-up error)
4A: ATDC Error (Toner density high concentration error)
4B: ATDC Error (Toner density low concentration error)
4D: Toner Empty Sensor Error
4.5.1 Check the error message

When certain machine problems occur a “Service call” message will appear on the LCD. When this
message appears, access the printer maintenance mode to determine the cause of the error. If there
are detail numbers to that error, the numbers are also available to see on this mode.
The error message will be displayed on the LCD:
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>, and select “Service Call” and press [Enter].
2. The detail of printer error will be displayed.
3. If two or more errors have occurred at the same time, press < > or < > of the cursor key to see
all the messages.
4. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby screen.
4-8
04: Second Rx motor error
Causes:
The machine checks the motor error signal from two minutes after the second Rx motor starts driving.
When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed.

1. Check the connection between RX Motor2 and the PRT PCB.
2. Verify the RX Motor2 rotates when the Power is ON.
3. Check the Power is supplied to the RX Motor2.
4. Replace the RX Motor1 if it doesn't rotate.
5. Replace the PRT PCB.
6. Replace the Main Control board.
06: Cassette Liftup Error (First cassette)

07: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional second cassette)
15: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional third cassette)
16: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional fourth cassette)
Causes:
The liftup sensor does not switch on within 10 seconds, after the cassette starts to lift up the paper.

1. In error 06 (cassette 1), check the connection between the Lift up motor and the PRT PCB.
In error 07, 15 or 16 (cassette 2, 3 or 4), check the connection between the Lift up motor and the
Casette PCB, and the connection between the cassette PCB and Main PCB.
2. Verify the Lift up motor rotates when the cassette close.
3. Replace the Lift up motor.
4. In error 06 (cassette 1), replace the PRT PCB.
In error 07, 15 or 16 (cassette 2, 3 or 4), replace the cassette.
08: Rx motor error

Causes:
The machine checks the motor error signal from two minutes after the Rx motor starts driving. When
the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed.

1. Check the connection between RX Motor1 and the PRT PCB.
2. Verify the RX Motor1 rotates when the Power is ON.
3. Check the Power is supplied to the RX Motor1.
4. Replace the RX Motor1 if it doesn't rotate.
4-9
0B: Fan Error
Causes:
The machine checks the fan error signal after two seconds from the time when the Rx motor starts
driving. When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this message will be displayed.

1. Verify the inside FAN rotates when the Power is ON.
2. Check the connection between the FAN and the PRT PCB.
3. Replace the FAN if it doesn't rotate.
0D: Temperature / Humid Sensor Error

1. Check the connection between the Temp/Humid Sensor and the PRT PCB.
2. Replace the Temp/Humid Sensor.
0E: Fan Control Thermistor Error

1. Check the connection between the Thermistor PCB and the LPH PCB.
2. Check the connection between the LPH PCBand the Main Contorl PCB.
3. Replace the Thermistor PCB.
5. Replace the LPH PCB.
11: ATDC Error (Vcont value abnormal error)

12: ATDC Error (Astd value abnormal error)
46: ATDC Error (Initialize time-up error)
47: ATDC Error (Disconnection error)
Vcont (Vlotage control) : This is the voltage that controls the ATDC sensor.
Astd (Answer standard) : This is target value of the toner density on the drum surface.

1. Check the connection between the Drum Cartridge and the PRT PCB.
2. Check the connection between the PRT PCB and the Main Control board.
3. Replace the Drum Cartridge.
4-10
18: Fuser error
Causes:
When the fuser miss to fill out the following conditions:
(The number indicates the detailed error code on the LCD)
1 The fuser detected a temperature between 40 °C and 90 for 100ms at standby.
2 The fuser does not become to 170 °C within 60 seconds while picking up paper.
3 The fuser does not become to 125 °C within 25 seconds while start printing.
4 The fuser does not become 105 °C within 25 seconds when warming up has started. Or, the
fuser does not become 125 °C within 30 seconds when warming up has finished.
5 The fuser detected a temperature higher than 250 °C.
6 The fuser does not become warmer more than 8 seconds during printing.
7 The fuser detected a lower temperature than 35 °C after the heater is set to ON for four seconds.
8 The fuser detected a higher temperature than 190 °C for 50 ms when sleep mode temperature
(35 °C ) and standby mode temperature (145 °C ) is set up.

1. Turn on the power again, and verify the fuser warms up.
2. Check the connection between Fusing thermistor and Main Control board.
3. Check the connection between Main Control board and LVPS.
4. Check the connection between Fuser and LVPS.
5. Replace the Fuser.
6. After Replace the fuser, verify the fuser warms up when the power is ON.
8. After Replace the Main Control board, verify the fuser warms up when the power is ON.
9. Replace the LVPS.
1E: Drum fuse error

Causes:
The machine could not blowout of the fuse.

2. Check the connection between the PRT PCB and Main Control board.
49: ATDC Error (Toner density control time-up)

4A: ATDC Error (Toner density high concentration error)
4B: ATDC Error (Toner density low concentration error)
2. Check the connection between the PRT PCB and the Main Control board.
6. Replace the Screw Clutch.
4-11
4D:Toner Empty Sensor Error
1. Check the connection between the Toner Empty Sensor and the PRT PCB.
2. Check the connenction between the PRT PCB and Main Control board.
3. Replace the Toner Empty Sensor.
4-12
4.6 Error Codes
If an error occurs during a communication, a check message will be printed. The following provides an
explanation of the information found on check messages.
• A possible solution to the problem
• The date and time of the attempted communication
• The sending location (if the remote fax has a Location ID)
• The number of pages which got through before the error terminated the call
• The error code
• The sample document.
You will also see a code listed in the Result column of the report. Result codes indicate the specific
problem encountered:
• “D” codes occur while dialing
• “R” codes occur during reception
• “T” codes occur during transmission
Here is a list of error codes the fax machine may print.
4.6.1 Dialing errors

D.0.2 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.
D.0.3, The remote unit didn’t respond, the call couldn’t be completed or stop was pressed during
D.0.8 dialing. Retry the call. If your machine repeats the message, call the remote fax unit’s
operator and verify that unit is operating properly.
D.0.6, Either the remote unit didn’t respond, the call somehow didn’t go through or <Stop> was
D.0.7 pressed during dialing. Try the call again.
4-13
4.6.2 Transmission errors
T.1.1 T1 time-out. The remote fax machine didn’t respond to your machine. This usually occurs
during a manual transmission or when an incorrect number was dialed. Call someone at
the remote machine.
T.1.4 Someone pressed <Stop> during fax transmission.
T.2.1 CFR or FTT was not received from the remote machine. Either the phone line
disconnected during fax communication or transmission became impossible due to bad
phone line conditions. Try the call again. It may be necessary to increase the output
levels on Machine Parameter 001. The receive machine may also have closed network
or block junk fax enabled.
T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. No mailbox at receiver or security transmission
is enabled.
T.2.3 FTT was received from the remote machine at 2400 bps. Bad phone line conditions
made fax communication impossible. Conditions can change rapidly, so try the call later.
Turn on the echo protect tone on Memory Switch 010. Also adjust the interval between
DCS and TCF on Memory Switch 011. If the problem persists, try increasing the output
levels on Machine Parameter 001.
T.3.1 The page counter in the fax machine detected a document feeder error during
transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try the call.
T.4.1 No response to MPS/EOP/EOM. Poor phone lines caused the receiving unit to
disconnect. Adjust the interval between CFR and data on Memory Switch 011. Try
increasing the output levels on Machine Parameter 001. It may also be necessary to
adjust the transmit speed on Machine Parameter 001.
T.4.2 RTN was received from the remote machine. After transmission began, poor line
conditions developed. Try the call again. Attempt the solutions described for the T.4.1
error.
T.4.4 Poor line conditions prevented transmission. PIP was received. The transmission was
interrupted by the call mode. The receiving unit may be experiencing problems. Try the
call again.
T.5.1 No response to RR from the remote machine. Line noise or other problems prevented
ECM transmission. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012.
T.5.2 No response to CTC. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission.
Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012.
T.5.3 EOR was received from the remote unit but further transmission was not possible. Adjust
Memory Switch 015 for this problem.
T.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.
T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
T.8.11 The remote fax machine didn’t complete the equalizer training phase.
4-14
4.6.3 Reception errors
R.1.1 T1 time-out. The calling unit was not a fax machine or the transmitting unit is having
difficulties.
R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your machine sends and receives only ITU-T
Group 3 fax communication, the industry standard since the early 1980s.
R.1.4 Someone pressed <Stop> during fax reception.
R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Enable the one second
pause after CED on Memory Switch 020. Also try increasing the echo wait time on
Memory Switch 021 if echo is on the line.
R.3.1 No response to CFR. DCN was received from the transmitter. Poor line conditions
made communication impossible. Adjust the echo wait time on Memory Switch 021. Try
increasing the output levels via Machine Parameter 001.
R.3.3 Too many errors were detected during data reception. The carrier was interrupted.
Increase the data error rate on Memory Switch 020.
R.3.4 DCN was received after FTT. Communication was not possible at 2400 bps. Poor phone
line conditions prevented fax communication. Enable the Eye Quality Check on Memory
Switch 031 and 032.
R.4.1 The machine received too large length data that over your machine’s limit.
R.4.2 MPS/EOM/EOP was not received. Either the line disconnected before reception was
completed or too many errors were detected by the receiving unit. Adjust the data
error rate on Memory Switch 020. It may also be necessary to decrease the receive
communication speed via Memory Switch 020.
R.4.4 The receiving fax machine has reached its memory capacity.
R.5.1 DCN was received instead of RR during ECM communication.
R.5.2 Line noise or other problems prevented ECM reception.
R.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.
R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.
4-15
4.7 LCD Failure
Symptom What to confirm Countermeasure
1 The LCD shows 1. Is the power switch turned on?. Yes Check No.2.
nothing. No Turn on the power switch.
2. Does the electrical outlet have Yes Check No.3.

access to power? No Check the power routing to the outlet.
3. Is the auto power off mode ON? Yes Press the Energy Save Mode button
(Is the Energy Save Mode lamp No to reset the mode.
illuminated?) Check No.4.
4. Has the power supply fuse blown Yew Check No.4.

out? No Check No.5.
5. Do CN2-13 and 14 of the power Yes Check No.6.

supply have +3.3V output? No Replace the power supply.
6. Do P12-13 and 14 on the Main PCB Yes Check No.7

have +3.3V output? No Check the harness between the
power and Main PCB.
7. Do P110-1 and 2 on the PANEL A Yes Check No.8.

PCB have +3.3V? No Check the harness between the
power and Main PCB.
8. If you replace the LCD, the symp- Yes Replace the LCD.
tom will be fixed. No Check No.9.
9. If you replace the Panel A PCB, the Yes Replace the Panel A PCB.
symptom will be fixed. No Check No.10.
10. If you replace the Main PCB, the Yes Replace the Main PCB.
symptom will be fixed. No Replace the machine.
* If none of the solutions work, then replace the machine.
4-16
4.8 Machine malfunction
No. Symptom What to confirm Countermeasure
1 The LCD shows 1. If you close the blinking cover, the Yes Solved.
“Please close symptom will be fixed. No Check No.2.
the blinking
cover.” 2. Is the cover secured firmly by Yes Check No.3.
screws? No Secure the cover properly.
3.
1) O pen the front cover or the side No Replace the INTERLOCK.
cover. Yes Check No.4.
If you press INTERLOCK, the PRT
PCB P152-3 will change to +24V
through 0V.
2) Open the ADF/RADF cover. No Replace the TXIL or the PI10(COVER).

Yes Check No.4
ADF model
If you press the TXIL, the ADF PCB
P1482-5 will change to +3V through
0V.
RADF model
If you press the PI10(COVER), the
ADF driver PCB CN9-6 will change
to +3V through 0V.
3) Open the side cover 1. Yes Replace the J1COP.

If you press the J1COP, the PRT No Check No.4
PCB P165-7 will change to +3V
through 0V.
4) Open the side cover 2, 3 and 4. Yes Replace the J2COP, J3COP or
If you press the J2COP, J3COP or No J4COP.
J4COP, the cassette PCB P4-1 will Check No.4
change to +3V through 0V.
4. If you replace the harness between Yes Replace the harness.
the Main PCB and the casette PCB, No Check No.5.
the message will disappear.
message will disappear. No Replace the machine.
* If none of the solutions work, then replace the machine.
4-17
2 Documents jam 1. Did you feed a single document? Yes Check No. 2.
frequently. No Check No. 3。
The LCD shows
“Please reset
the document.”
2. Did
you use thin paper or con- Yes Recommend the customer to use the
verted paper? No book scanner.
Check No. 8.
3. D
id you set documents more than Yes Check No. 4.
the capacity? No Check No. 5.
4. If you set documents within the Yes Solved.

capacity, the symptom be fixed. No Check No. 5.
5. D
id you use wrinkled or curled Yes Recommend the customer to use the
documents? No book scanner.
Check No. 6.
6. D
oes the machine still feed docu- Yes Check No. 7.
ments? No Check No. 8.
7. D
oes the machine still discharge Yes Check No. 23.
documents? No Check No. 24.
8. Does the clutch rotate properly? Yes Check No. 9.

No Check the clutch condition.
9. D
oes the separate roller work Yes Check No. 11.
properly? No Check No. 9.
10. Does the transfer gear work Yes Check No. 10.
properly? No Adjust the gear.
11.
(ADF model)
Does the ADF motor, lead motor and Yes Check No. 12.
paper supply motor rotate properly? No Replace the ADF motor, lead motor or the
paper supply motor.
(RADF model)
Does the feed motor (M1) and pickup Yes Check No. 12.
motor (M2) rotate properly? No Replace the feed motor (M1) or pickup
motor (M2).
12. Is the separation pressure appro- Yes Check No. 18.
priate? No Adjust the separation pressure.
13. Do CN2-3, 4, 5 and 6 of the power Yes Check No. 13.
supply have +24V output? No Replace the power supply.
14. If you replace the harness Yes Replace the harness between the power
between the power supply and supply and Main PCB .
the Main PCB, the message will No Check No. 15.
disappear.
15. Do P12-3, 4 and 5, and P6 on the Yes Check No. 16.
Main PCB have +24V output ? No Replace the Main PCB.
16. Has the DS1 or PI10 (EMPTY) Yes Check No. 17.
sensor been installed properly? No Re-install it properly.
17. Does the feeler for the DS1 or Yes Check No. 18.
PI10 (EMPTY) sensor work No Replace the DS1 or PI10 (EMPTY) sen-
properly? sor.
18. Does the feeler for the DS2 or Yes Check No. 19.
PI7(READ) sensor work properly? No Replace the DS2 or PI7(READ) sensor.
19. Are there any foreign objects Yes Remove the objects.
stuck around paper guides? No Check No. 20.
4-18
2 Documents jam 20.

frequently. (ADF model)
The LCD shows Does the voltage level of P1487-1 on Yes Check No. 22.
“Please reset the ADF PCB change to +0V when No Check No. 21.
the document.” the DS1 is ON, and to +3V when the
DS1 is OFF?
(RADF model)
Does the voltage level of CN9 pin 3 Yes Check No. 22.
on the ADF driver PCB change to No Check No. 21.
+0V when the PI10 (EMPTY) is ON,
and to +3V when the PI10 (EMPTY)
is OFF?
21. If you replace the DS1 or PI10 Yes Replace the DS1 or PI10 (EMPTY).
(EMPTY) sensor, the symptom No Replace the PRT PCB.
will be fixed.
22.
(ADF model)
Does the voltage level of P1486-1 on Yes Check No. 23.
the ADF PCB change to +0V when No Check No. 24.
the DS2 is ON, and to +3V when the
DS2 is OFF?
(RADF model)
Does the voltage level of CN8 pin 6 Yes Check No. 23.
on the ADF driver PCB change to No Check No. 24.
+0V when the PI7(READ) is ON, and
to +3V when the PI7(READ) is OFF?
23. If you replace the DS2 or Yes Replace the DS2 or PI7(READ) .
PI7(READ) sensor, the symptom No Replace the PRT PCB.
will be fixed.
24. Is the separation roller dirty? Yes Replace the separation roller.
No Check No. 25.
25. Is the pad separator dirty? Yes Replace the pad separator.
No Replace the machine.
3 “Complete” 1. Is the stamp setting ON? Yes Check No. 2.

mark is not No Turn it ON.
stamped.
2. Does the stamp has ink? Yes Check No. 3.
No Replace the ink pad.
3. If you replace the solenoid, the Yes Replace the solenoid.
symptom will be fixed. No Check No. 4.
4. D
o CN2 pin 3,4,5 and 6 of the Yes Check No. 5.
power supply have +24V output? No Replace the power supply.
5.
(ADF model)
Does P1484 pin 1 on the ADF PCB Yes Check No. 7.
have +24V output? No Check No. 6.
(RADF model)
Does CN10 pin 1 and 2 on the ADF Yes Check No. 7.
drive PCB have +24V output? No Check No. 6.
6. If you replace the ADF PCB or ADF Yes Replace the PCB.
drive PCB, the symptom will be No Check No. 7.
fixed.
the ADF PCB and scanner PCB, No Check No. 8.
ADF driver PCB and scanner PCB
the symptom will be fixed.
8. If you replace the scanner PCB, the Replace the PCB.
symptom will be fixed. Replace the machine.
4-19
4 Documents skew 1. H
ave the document guides been Yes Check No. 2.
adjusted properly? No Re-adjust the guides properly.
2. D
id you place different size docu- Yes Set only the same size documents.
ments at the same time? No Check No. 3.
3. A
re there any foreign objects on the Yes Remove the objects.
paper pass? No Check No. 4.
4. H
ave the separator roller and the Yes Replace them.
pad separator been worn out? No Check No. 5.
5. A
re there any problems with on Yes Check their operations.
the installations and operations of No Check No. 6.
the separator roller and the pad
separator?
6. Is the outer guide A deformed? Yes Fix or replace it.

5 Documents get 1. Are they thin documents? Yes Recommend customer to use the book
wrinkled or torn No scanner.
frequently. Check No. 2.
2. A
re there any foreign objects on the Yes Remove the objects.
document tray? No Check No. 3.
3. D
o the documents get wrinkled or Yes Check No. 5.
torn around the feeding entry area? No Check No. 7.
4. H
as the entry area of the outer Yes Repair or replace it.
guide A been deformed? No Check No. 7.
5. Is the roller separator dirty. Yes Replace the roller.

6 The warning 1. A
re there any foreign objects Yes Remove the objects.
message “ Lamp (including documents) on the docu- No Check No. 2.
error. Call for ser- ment glass?
vice.” appears.
2. Has the lamp been illuminated? Yes Check No. 3.
No Check No. 14.
3. H
as the sheet document press been Yes Check No. 4.
properly attached to the back side of No Re-attach the sheet document press.
the platen cover?
4. Is the sheet document press dirty? Yes Clean the sheet document press.
No Check No. 5.
5. A
re the contact glass and the docu- Yes Clean the glasses.
ment glass dirty? No Check No. 6.
6. Is the mirror dirty? Yes Clean the mirror.

No Check No. 7.
7. Has the CCD harness come off? Yes Connect the harness.
No Check No. 8.
8. Is the home sensor getting loose? Yes Check the sensor.

No Check No. 9.
9. If you replace the home sensor, the Yes Replace the sensor.
10. Has the mirror carriage drive belt Yes Secure the belt properly.
been secured properly? No Replace the machine.
4-20
7 The message 1. D
id you load paper in the cassette Yes Check No.2.
“Paper supply properly? No Re-load paper.
empty.” appears.
2. Is there electrical continuity in the Yes Check No. 3.
harness between the PES sensor No Replace the harness between the
and the PRT PCB? PES sensor and the PRT PCB.
3. Is there electrical continuity in the Yes Replace the harness between the
harness between the Main PCB and Main PCB and the cassette PCB.
the PRT PCB? No Check No. 4.
4. If you replace the PES sensor, the Yes Replace the PES sensor.
message will disappear. No Check No. 5.
5. If you replace the PRT PCB, the Yes Replace the PRT PCB.
message will disappear. No Checak No. 6.
8 Paper jams or the 1. Is there any paper jam on the paper Yes Remove the paper.
message “Open pass? No Check No. 2.
the blinking cover
and check......” 2. Is there electrical continuity in the Yes Check No. 3, and the PSS sensor.
appears. harness between the PSS sensor No Replace the PSS sensor or the PRT
and the PRT PCB? PCB.
3. Is there electrical continuity in the Yes Replace the harness between the
harness between the PDS sensor No PDS sensor and the Main PCB.
and the Main PCB?
4. If you replace the PSS sensor or Yes Replace the PSS sensor or the PDS
the PDS sensor, the message will No sensor.
disappear. Check No. 5.
5. If you replace the PRT PCB, the Yes Replace the PRT PCB.
message will disappear. No Check No. 6.
9 Documents skew 1. If you re-load the document and Yes Check No. 2.
make more than 10 copies, a docu- No Solved
ment skew still occurs.
2. Has the paper cassette been Yes Check No. 3.

installed properly? No Re-install it properly.
3. Does the cassette have any mal- Yes Replace the casette.
functions? No Replace the machine.
10 When using the 1. If you print “Checkered Pattern”, the Yes Check No. 2.
auto feeder, the image will expands more vertically No The sender’s problem.
reception image than horizontally. (It might be caused by using unsuit-
expanded. Note: The following causes are also able documents, or sender transmis-
possible. The sender sent the sion problems.)
document data using unsuit-
able documents like exces-
sively thick paper, no carbon
paper, rear carbon paper,
and so on.
2. Is the drawing force of the feed Yes Check No. 3.

roller B and the heat roller correct? No Clean the feed roller B.
Replace the feed roller B and the
fuser.
3. If you replace the Main PCB, the Yes Solved.

4-21
11 When using the 1. If you print “Checkered Pattern”, the Yes Check No. 2.
auto feeder, the image is more compressed vertically No The sender’s problem.
reception image than horizontally. (It might be caused by sender trans-
compressed. mission problems.)
2. If you replace the feed roller B and the Yes Solved.
fuser, the symptom will be fixed. No Check No. 3.
3. If you replace the Main PCB, the Yes Solved.

12 The printouts are 1. Are copied and test print images too Yes Check No. 2.
too light. light, or uneven density? No The sender’s problem.
Note: The following causes are also (Possible causes are inappropriate
possible. The contrast setting contrast setting, using colored docu-
might be not appropriate. Con- ments, poor line connection, using
trast irregularities are likely on unsuitable documents, or sender
printouts of documents contain- transmission problems.)
ing thin lines.
2. If you replace the toner or the drum Yes Replace the toner or the drum car-
cartridge, the symptom will be fixed. tridge.
No Refer to the “4.7 The Image Quality
Problems”.
13 Clock malfunc- 1. Are there any errors in the clock set- Yes Follow the instruction manual.
tion ting process? No Check No. 2.
2. Is it possible to reset the clock? Yes Check No. 3.

No Replace the Main PCB.
14 The LCD does 1. Is an error message displayed on the Yes Press <Reset> to delete the LCD
not show the LCD? message.
message for No Check No. 2.
receiving or
sending a FAX. 2. Has the phone line been connected? Yes Check No. 3.
No Disconnect the line, then press the
transmission switch.
3. A
re the check messages printing dur- Yes Restart the transmission after printing
ing fax transmission? the check messages.
No Check No. 4.
4. If you replace the panel A PCB, the Yes Replace the panel A PCB.
5. If you replace the harness between Yes Replace the harness between the
the panel A PCB and the Main PCB, PCB panel A PCB and the Main PCB.
the symptom will be fixed. No Check No. 6.
4-22
15 The machine 1. Is the machine verifying the pass- Yes Check No. 2.
does not receive word? No Check No. 3.
or send a FAX.
2. Is the password correct? Yes Stop using the password verification,
then check No. 3.
No Match with the password
3. H
ave the machine parameter output Yes Check No. 4.
and the memory switch equalizer No Adjust the settings properly.
been set properly?
4. If you replace the NCU PCB, the Yes Replace the NCU PCB.
5.If you replace the harness between Yes Replace the harness between the
the NCU PCB and the Main PCB, the NCU PCB and the Main PCB .
the panel A PCB and the Main PCB, panel A PCB and the Main PCB .
the symptom will be fixed. No Check No. 7.
16 The auto mem- 1. H

as the auto memory receive lamp Yes Check No. 2.
ory reception been illuminated? No Press auto memory reception key to
does not work. illuminate the lamp.
2. If you replace the NCU PCB, the Yes Replace the NCU PCB .
3. If you replace the NCU PCB, the Yes Replace the harness between the
symptom will be fixed. NCU PCB and the Main PCB .
No Check No. 4.
panel A PCB and the Main PCB , the panel A PCB and the Main PCB .
5. If you replace the panel A PCB, the Yes Replace the panel A PCB .
6. If you replace the Main PCB, the Yes Replace the Main PCB .
17 A dial signal 1. H
as the line type setting been set Yes Check No. 2.
output fails after correctly ? No Set the correct line type.
entering the
number from the 2. If you replace the NCU PCB, the Yes Replace the NCU PCB.
numeric keys. symptom will be fixed. No Check No. 3.
the NCU PCB and the Main PCB, the No Check No. 4.
symptom will be fixed.
the panel A PCB and the Main PCB, No Check No. 5.
the symptom will be fixed.
4-23
18 The transmission 1. H
as the volume setting been set to Yes Set the volume except OFF.
monitor does not OFF? No Check No. 2.
work.
2. H as the setting for the transmission Yes Check No. 3.
monitor been set up? No Set up the setting.
3. If you replace the speaker, the symp- Yes Replace the speaker.
tom will be fixed. No Check No. 4.
19 An unusual 1. D
oes the sound occurs while scan- Yes Check No. 2.
sound occurs. ning? No Check No. 10.
2. D
oes the sound occurs while scan- ADF Check No. 3.
ning using the ADF/RADF or FBS. FBS Check No. 6.
3. A
re there any objects interfering with Yes Remove the objects.
the roller or the roller pole? No Check No. 4.
4. H
as the motor (ADF) sounded abnor- Yes Clean the rollers / Check the harness.
mal? No Check No. 5.
5. A
re there any foreign objects around Yes Remove the objects.
the gear (ADF)? No Check No. 17.
6. H
as the motor (FBS) sounded abnor- Yes Check the harness.
mal? No Check No. 7.
7. A
the gear (FBS)? No Check No. 8.
8. A
the FBS pulley? No Check No. 9.
9. Are there any foreign objects on the Yes Clean the path using dustless cloth.
Mirror carriage path? No Check No. 17.
10. Does the sound occur while print- Yes Check No. 11.
ing? No Check No. 17.
11. If you remove the drum or toner car- Yes Replace either cartridge or both.
tridge, the symptom will be fixed. No Check No. 12.
12. Are there any foreign objects around Yes Remove the objects.
the drum gear, fuser gear or transfer No Check No. 13.
gear?
13. If you replace the drum or toner car- Yes Replace either cartridge or both.
tridge, the symptom will be fixed. No Check No. 14.
14. If you replace the transfer roller or Yes Replace the transfer roller or the fus-
the fusing unit, the symptom will be ing unit.
fixed. No Check No. 15.
15. Are there any foreign objects around Yes Remove the objects.
the transferring parts? No Check No. 16.
16. Does the fan rotate smoothly? Yes Check No. 17.
No Replace the parts.
4-24
20 The document 1. Is the memory backed up with the fol- Yes No problem.
memory can not lowing procedure? No Check No. 2.
be backed up. 1) During transmission
F
irst disconnect the phone line,
then send the data. Next, turn the
machine off while waiting for re-dial.
When you turn the machine on again,
the document memory should remain.
2) During reception Yes Put a jumper pin on JP2 of the Main

Initiate out of memory reception PCB to back up.
without the document, then turn the No Check No. 2.
machine off. When you turn the
machine on again, the document
memory should remain.
2. H
as the battery been set to the voice Yes Check No. 4.
PCB? No Set the battery.
3. H
ave the voice PCB and the battery Yes Check No. 5.
been connected to P2? No Connect the harness.
4. H
as the voice PCB been connected to Yes Check No. 5.
the Main PCB? No Connect the harness.
5. Is the voltage between the GND and Yes Check No. 7.
the Main PCB P2 pin 13 and 14 within No Check No. 6.
the correct range? (+3.57V through
+3.13V)
6. Is the battery voltage within the pos- Yes Check No. 7.
sible value (above 2.2V) to be backed No Replace the battery.
up?
7. D
id you charge the battery for more Yes Check No. 8.
than 24 hours? No Charge the battery.
8. If you replace the power supply, the Yes Replace the power supply.
9. If you replace the Main PCB, the Yes Replace the symptom.
4-25
21 The message 1. Check the error code. 01 Check No. 2.

“Systemstatus 03 Check No. 3.
instabil Strom
aus- und ein XX” 2. Is the NCU PCB correctly connected Yes Check No. 7.
is displayed on to the Main PCB? (Check the harness No Replace the NCU PCB or the har-
the LCD. connecting NCU PCB P90 and Main ness.
PCB P9)
XX indicates the
error code 01 3. Is the OfficeBridge board or the Net- Yes Check No. 4.
or 03 work interface board equipped to the No Check No. 6.
01: Modem PCB machine?
error
03: Error of 4. Is the OfficeBridge board or the Yes Check No. 5.
initializing Network interface board correctly con- No Replace the OfficeBridge board or the
optional connected to the Main PCB? Network interface board.
necting PCB (Check the harness connecting to
Main PCB P7)
5. Is the printer control board equipped Yes Check No. 6.

to the machine? No Check No. 7.
6. Is the printer control board correctly Yes Check No. 7.

connected to the Main PCB? (Check No Replace the printer control board or
the harness connecting to Main PCB the Joint PCB.
P6)
7. Turn off the machine and wait for more Yes Solved.
than three minutes. Turn the machine No heck No. 8.
on. Does the message disappear?
4-26
4.9 The Image Quality Problems
If any image failure has occurred, first make the initial checks (refer to page 4-1), then proceed to the
corresponding image failure troubleshooting procedure.
• Check the parameters for image quality adjustments and see if the problems solves.
• Adjust the background level and see if the problem solves. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> and se-
lect “Background level”, and press <Start>.)
• Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system (Scanner Section) or the output system
(Printer section):
1. Make copy full size copy of a document.
(Original) (Copy)
2. Make a reduction copy of the document.
(Original) (Copy) - Input system cause scanner
(Original) (Copy) - Output system cause: printer
4-27
4.9.1 Blank Copy or black copy
Typical Fault Image:

Blank copy:
Section Step Check Item Result Action
Scanner 1 Is the Scanner drive transmis- NO Check and change as neces-
sion mechanism in good condi- sary.
tion?
2 Do the connections from CCD NO Reconnect.
 Scanner PCB  Main PCB YES Change Scanner PCB, Main
 LPH PCB  LED unit re- PCB in that order.
main intact?
Black copy:
Scanner 1 Does the Exposure Lamp turn YES Perform steps 4 and onward.
ON when make a copy with
NO Check connectors and har-
open the platen cover?
nesses and perform steps 2
and 3.
2 Does the voltage across P140B NO Change Scanner PCB.
pin 1 on the Scanner PCB
change from DC0V to DC24V
when step 1 is performed
again?
3 Does the voltage across P147 YES Change Inverter or exposure
pin 2 on the Scanner PCB lamp, in that order.
change to “Low” when step 1 is
performed again? NO Change Scanner PCB.
4 Are the mirrors and lens in- NO Install them properly.

stalled properly?
5 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? YES Clean or change.
4-28
Blank copy and black copy:
Drum cartridge 1 Developing Unit is driven prop- NO Correct or change drive cou-
erly. pling mechanism.
2 Developing bias contact termi- YES Clean or change the drum car-
nal, glide bias, sealed ground tridge.
or come electrode is dirty or
deformed.
LED unit 3 Is the LED unit (lever B3) set NO Install it properly.
properly?
PCBs 4 LED unit and LPH PCB con- NO Correct.

nected properly?
Transfer 5 Image transfer current contact YES Clean or change the terminal.
terminal is dirty or deformed.
- 6 Is the trouble settled with NO Change drum cartridge.

above steps? Change LED unit.
Change High Voltage Power Supply.
Change LPH PCB.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-29
4.9.2 Low Image Density or rough image

Scanner 1 Image transfer current contact NO Check and change as neces-
terminal is dirty or deformed. sary.
 Scanner PCB  Main PCB
 LPH PCB  LED unit re- YES Change Scanner PCB, Main
main intact? PCB, LPH PCB in that order.
3 Are the press document plate YES Clean each parts and set the
and contact glass dirty? background level again.
4 Are you copying a thick volume YES Copy with opened platen cov-
while trying to close the platen er.
cover trying to close?

LED 1 Is the LED unit (lever B3) set NO Install properly.
properly?
Transfer 2 Image transfer current contact YES Clean or change the terminal.
terminal is dirty or deformed.
Drum cartridge 3 Developing bias contact termi- YES Clean or change the drum car-
nal, grid bias, sealed ground tridge.
deformed.
above steps? Change transfer roller.
Change LED unit.
Change LPH PCB.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-30
4.9.3 Foggy background

- 1 Sunlight or any other extrane- YES Protect the machine from ex-
ous light enters the machine. traneous light.
Scanner 1 Are the press document plate YES Clean each parts and set the
and contact glass dirty? background level again.
2 Are you copying a thick volume YES Copy with opened platen cov-
while trying to close the platen er.
cover trying to close?
3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? YES Clean or change.
4 Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or YES Clean or change.
deteriorated?
5 Do the connections between NO Reconnect.
the Exposure Lamp and IN-
VERTER remain intact?
6 Do the connections from IN- NO Reconnect.
VERTER to Scanner PCB
remain intact?
7 Do the connections from Scan- NO Reconnect.
ner PCB to Main PCB remain
intact?
8 Do the connections from Main NO Reconnect.
PCB to High Voltage Unit re-
main intact?

1 Sunlight or any other extrane- YES Protect the copier from extra-
ous light enters the copier. neous light.
Drum cartridge 2 PC Drum is dirty. YES Change the drum cartridge.
part
3 Comb Electrode contact termi- YES Clean or change the drum car-
nal is dirty or deformed. tridge.
4 Grid voltage contact terminal is YES Clean or change the drum car-
dirty or deformed. tridge.
Erase lamp 5 Erase Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
6 Erase Lamp is conducting. NO Change.

above steps? Change LED unit.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-31
4.9.4 Black Lines / White Lines

Black lines:
Scanner 1 Are the mirrors, lens, contact YES Clean.
glass or document glass dirty
with foreign matter?
 Scanner PCB  Main PCB YES Change Scanner PCB or Main
 LPH PCB LED unit re- PCB in that order.
main intact?
Black lines :
Paper path 1 Paper path is dirty with toner. YES Clean
Drum cartridge 2 OPC Drum is dirty YES Change the drum cartridge.
Fuser 3 Fusing rollers are dirty or YES Change the fuser.
scratchy.
above steps? Change LPH PCB.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
White lines:
Scanner 1 Are the contact glass or docu- YES Clean.
ment glass dirty with foreign
matter?
main intact?
White lines :
Transfer roller 1 Image Transfer Roller is dented YES Change the transfer roller.
or scratchy.
Drum cartridge 2 OPC Drum is dirty. YES Change the fuser.
Fuser 3 Fusing rollers are dirty or YES Clean or change.
scratchy.
LED 4 LED is dirty. YES Clean.
5 Is the LED unit (lever B3) set NO Install properly.
properly?
- 6 Is the trouble settled with NO Change the drum cartridge.
above steps? Change LPH PCB .
Change PRT PCB .
Change Main PCB .
4-32
4.9.5 Black Spots

2 Do the connections from CCD YES Change Scanner PCB, Main
 Scanner PCB  Main PCB PCBin that order.
 PCB LPH  LED unit re- NO Reconnect.
main intact?

Paper pass 1 Paper pass is dirty with toner. YES Clean.
Fuser 2 Fuser rollers are dirty or YES Change the fuser.
scratchy.
Drum cartridge 3 OPC Drum is dirty. YES Change drum cartridge.
part
4 Comb Electrode contact termi- YES Clean or change drum car-
nal is dirty or deformed. tridge.
5 Grid voltage contact terminal is YES Clean or change drum car-
dirty or deformed. tridge.
Erase lamp 6 Erase Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
7 Erase Lamp is conducting. NO Change.

above steps? Change High Voltage Power Supply.
Change the transfer roller.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-33
4.9.6 Void areas

2 Do the connections from CCD YES Change Scanner PCB or Main
 Scanner PCB  Main PCB PCB in that order.
 LPH PCB  LED unit re- NO Reconnect.
main intact?

Drum cartridge 1 OPC Drum is dirty. YES Change drum cartridge.
or scratchy.
Fuser 3 Fuser rollers are dirty or YES Change the fuser.
scratchy.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-34
4.9.7 Smear on back

Paper path 1 Paper path is dirty with toner. YES Clean
or scratchy.
Fuser 3 Fusing rollers are dirty or YES Change the fuser.
scratchy.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-35
4.9.8 Uneven image density

Scanner 1 Are the mirrors, lens, contact YES Clean or change.
2 Is the Shading Sheet under the YES Clean or change.
Size cover dirty?
3 Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or YES Clean or change.
deteriorated?
 LPH PCB LED unit re- PCB in that order.
main intact?

or scratchy.
Drum cartridge 2 Developing unit is driven prop- NO Correct or change drive cou-
erly? pling mechanism.
nal, glide bias, sealed ground tridge.
deformed.
Change the transfer roller.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-36
4.9.9 Gradation Reproduction Failure

Scanner 1 Is the Shading Sheet under the YES Clean or change.
Size cover dirty?
2 Are the contact glass or docu- YES Clean or change.

ment glass dirty with foreign
matter?
main intact?

or scratchy.
Drum cartridge 2 Developing unit is driven prop- NO Correct or change drive cou-
erly? pling mechanism.
nal, grid bias, sealed ground tridge.
deformed.
Change LPH PCB.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-37
4.9.10 Periodically Uneven Image
4040F4C500DA

Scanner 1 Is the FBS Motor drive gear YES Clean or change.
cracked or dirty with foreign
matter?
2 Is the Scanner Motor secured NO Secure properly.
properly?
3 Are the FBS belts attached YES Adjust the belt tension.
loose?
4 Is the Mirror carriage secured NO Secure properly.
properly?
5 Are the Mirror carriage drive NO Wind the belts properly.
belts wound properly?
6 Are the Scanner rails damaged YES Clean or change.
or dirty with foreign matter?
 Scanner PCB  Main PCB
 LPH PCB  LED unit re- YES Change Scanner PCB or Main
main intact? PCB in that order.

Drum cartridge 1 Developing unit is driving prop- NO Correct or change drive cou-
erly. pling mechanism.
2 OPC Drum and Image Transfer NO Correct or change drive cou-
Roller are driven properly. pling mechanism.
Paper transfer 3 Register roller is driven prop- NO Correct or change drive cou-
section erly. pling mechanism.
Fusing section 4 Fusing Unit is driven properly. NO Change the fuser.
5 Fusing rollers are dirty or YES Clean or change the fuser.
scratchy.
Transfer roller 6 Image Transfer roller is dented YES Change the transfer roller.
or scratchy.
above steps? Change driving unit.
Change LPH PCB.
Change PRT PCB.
Change Main PCB.
4-38
5 Maintenance & Adjustment
5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Re/Disassemble................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.1 COVERS.................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.2 PCBS........................................................................................................................ 5-20
5.2.3 ADF SECTION (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)............................................................ 5-37
5.2.4 FBS SECTION......................................................................................................... 5-54
5.2.5 PRINTER SECTION................................................................................................. 5-74
5.2.6 RADF SECTION (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)........................................................ 5-128
5.3 Adjustment.................................................................................................................... 5-190
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment............................................................... 5-190
5.3.2 Printer registration mode........................................................................................ 5-190
5.3.3 Registration adjustment.......................................................................................... 5-193
5.3.4 Zoom adjustment.................................................................................................... 5-198
5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment............................................................................ 5-202
5.3.6 ADF skew adjustment (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)............................................... 5-203
5.3.7 RADF Adjustment (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)...................................................... 5-204
5.3.8 Drum ATDC adjustment......................................................................................... 5-208
5-1
5.1 Maintenance schedule
 Scanning Section (ADF)
Maintenance Cycle (pages)
Parts Name QTY Reference Page
Clean Replace
50,000 or
Roller Separator *1  1 5-40
2 years
50,000 or
Piece Separator *1  1 5-52
2 years
Clean when
Contact glass & Pane *2 1 5-54, 5-55
dirty
Sheet document press Clean when
1 5-71
(White sheet) *2 dirty
Exposure Lamp *2 1,000 hours 1 5-56
Roller Feed  100,000 1 5-47
Roller Exit  100,000 1 5-46
*1 Replace these parts at the same time.
*2 It is not a maintenance parts. However, please replace when they do not work.
 Scanning Section (RADF)

Parts Name QTY Reference
Clean Replace
White plate (pressure plate) As required 1 [5]
As required or ever
Document glass (large / small) 1 [1], [4]
2000 sheets
Document glass holder As required 1 [2]
Vertical size plate As required 1 [3]
As required or ever
Platen roller 1 [6]
2000 sheets
Pickup Roller Unit 80,000 1 page 5-137
Lower Registration Roller 80,000 1 page 5-142
Delivery Reversing Roller (upper) 80,000 1 page 5-148
Reverse guide Unit 80,000 1 page 5-148
Read Roller 1 80,000 1 page 5-153
Read Roller 2 80,000 1 page 5-158
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
5-2
 Printer Section
Clean Replace
Roller Retard  100,000 1 5-115
Roller Feed  100,000 1 5-124
Roller Separator / Roller Pickup  100,000 1 5-118
50,000 or
Roller Pickup MP  1 5-101
2 years
Pad Pressure MP  100,000 1 5-103
Roller Register  100,000 1 5-99
Roller Exit A, B  100,000 1 5-94, 5-95
Roller Transfer 60,000 1 5-76
Gear at the Roller Transfer 30,000 1 5-76
Filter Ozone 150,000 1 5-126
Case dust 150,000 1 5-127
 Developing Section
Clean Replace
Drum cartridge 100,000 1
Toner cartridge 10,000 1 See Operating
Toner cartridge 20,000 1 Instructions
LED print head  1,000 hours 1
Note: “” means to clean the mechanism when a paper take-up or transport failure or print quality
problems occurs.
Note: The maintenance cycle (pages or years) may be shorter than the above value according to
the environment or usage of the machine, and the documents and paper that are used. The
maintenance cycle (pages or years) are not insured and early replacement of the parts may be
needed to maintain the machine quality.
5-3
5.2 Re/Disassemble
Before disassembling, disconnect the power cord and line cord.
5.2.1 COVERS.................................................................................................................... 5-7

PLATE PRINTER B......................................................................................................... 5-8
COVER PLATEN............................................................................................................ 5-8
COVER TX SIDE B......................................................................................................... 5-9
COVER TX SIDE F....................................................................................................... 5-10
GUIDE OUTER............................................................................................................. 5-11
COVER LEFT TOP....................................................................................................... 5-12
COVER RIGHT TOP..................................................................................................... 5-13
COVER FRONT UPPER............................................................................................... 5-14
COVER BACK TOP...................................................................................................... 5-15
PLATE PRINTER A....................................................................................................... 5-16
COVER L...................................................................................................................... 5-16
COVER SIDE R............................................................................................................ 5-17
COVER BACK SIDE..................................................................................................... 5-17
COVER TRAY............................................................................................................... 5-18
COVER SPEAKER....................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.2 PCBS........................................................................................................................ 5-20

PCB ADF....................................................................................................................... 5-21
PCB PANEL A / PANEL B............................................................................................ 5-22
LCD............................................................................................................................... 5-23
PCB CONN MOT.......................................................................................................... 5-25
PCB LPH....................................................................................................................... 5-26
PCB CCD...................................................................................................................... 5-27
PCB INVERTER............................................................................................................ 5-28
PCB MAIN..................................................................................................................... 5-29
PCB VOICE................................................................................................................... 5-30
PCB NCU...................................................................................................................... 5-31
PCB PRT....................................................................................................................... 5-32
PCB SCANNER............................................................................................................ 5-33
PCB PSU HV................................................................................................................ 5-34
PCB PSU...................................................................................................................... 5-35
PCB BPSIZE................................................................................................................. 5-36
5.2.3 ADF SECTION (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)............................................................ 5-37

TRAY DOCUMENT....................................................................................................... 5-37
SENSOR (DL1)............................................................................................................. 5-38
SENSOR (DW1) / SENSOR (DW2).............................................................................. 5-39
ROLLER SEPARATOR................................................................................................. 5-40
ROLLER PRESS........................................................................................................... 5-41
GUIDE INNER............................................................................................................... 5-42
FRAME MOTOR........................................................................................................... 5-43
CLUTCH (MG).............................................................................................................. 5-44
CLUTCH (CL)................................................................................................................ 5-45
ROLLER EXIT............................................................................................................... 5-46
ROLLER FEED............................................................................................................. 5-47
SENSOR (DS1)............................................................................................................. 5-49
SENSOR (TXIL)............................................................................................................ 5-50
SENSOR (DS2) / SENSOR (DRS)............................................................................... 5-51
PIECE SEPARATOR.................................................................................................... 5-52
HINGE........................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.2.4 FBS SECTION......................................................................................................... 5-54

CONTACT GLASS........................................................................................................ 5-54
PANE............................................................................................................................ 5-55
LAMP............................................................................................................................ 5-56
CARRIAGE A................................................................................................................ 5-57
MIRROR A.................................................................................................................... 5-60
CARRIAGE B................................................................................................................ 5-61
MIRROR B / MIRROR C............................................................................................... 5-63
MIRROR CARRIAGE ALIGNMENT.............................................................................. 5-64
5-4
SENSOR (HOME)......................................................................................................... 5-66
SENSOR (BSS)............................................................................................................ 5-67
FBS MOTOR................................................................................................................. 5-68
SENSOR (APS) / SENSOR (BIS)................................................................................. 5-70
SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS....................................................................................... 5-71
FRAME SCANNER....................................................................................................... 5-72
5.2.5 PRINTER SECTION................................................................................................. 5-74

TRAY MP...................................................................................................................... 5-74
COVER JAM ACCESS................................................................................................. 5-75
ROLLER TRANSFER................................................................................................... 5-76
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A.......................................................................................... 5-77
SENSOR (DUP)............................................................................................................ 5-79
SENSOR (J1-OP)......................................................................................................... 5-80
MOTOR 1...................................................................................................................... 5-81
MOTOR 2...................................................................................................................... 5-81
CLUTCH (PAPER REGIST).......................................................................................... 5-82
CLUTCH (PAPER FEED)............................................................................................. 5-83
PCB DUPLEX............................................................................................................... 5-84
FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX..................................................................................... 5-84
MOTOR (Dupex)........................................................................................................... 5-85
CLUTCH (Duplex)......................................................................................................... 5-85
SENSOR (THRM)......................................................................................................... 5-86
FRAME DRIVE A.......................................................................................................... 5-87
SPEAKER..................................................................................................................... 5-89
SENSOR (INTERLOCK)............................................................................................... 5-90
FUSER UNIT................................................................................................................. 5-91
EXIT ASSY.................................................................................................................... 5-92
ROLLER EXIT A........................................................................................................... 5-94
ROLLER EXIT B........................................................................................................... 5-95
SENSOR (SWBK)......................................................................................................... 5-96
SENSOR (PDS)............................................................................................................ 5-97
LED............................................................................................................................... 5-98
ROLLER REGISTER.................................................................................................... 5-99
ROLLER PICKUP....................................................................................................... 5-101
PAD PRESSURE MP.................................................................................................. 5-103
SENSOR (PES BS)..................................................................................................... 5-104
SENSOR (PSS).......................................................................................................... 5-105
SOLENOID.................................................................................................................. 5-106
FAN............................................................................................................................. 5-107
CLUTCH (SCREW)..................................................................................................... 5-108
MOTOR (DC).............................................................................................................. 5-110
SENSOR (TOS).......................................................................................................... 5-111
SENSOR (CART)........................................................................................................ 5-114
ROLLER RETARD...................................................................................................... 5-115
ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE.................................................................. 5-118
REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATE..................................................................... 5-119
REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP........................................................................... 5-120
SENSOR (PES).......................................................................................................... 5-121
SENSOR (LIFT UP).................................................................................................... 5-122
SENSOR (PSIZE)....................................................................................................... 5-123
ROLLER FEED........................................................................................................... 5-124
FILTER OZONE.......................................................................................................... 5-126
CASE DUST................................................................................................................ 5-127
5.2.6 RADF SECTION (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)........................................................ 5-128

Removing from the Host Machine............................................................................... 5-128
Feeder(Cover Platen).................................................................................................. 5-128
External Covers........................................................................................................... 5-129
Front Cover................................................................................................................. 5-129
Rear Cover.................................................................................................................. 5-129
Feeder Cover.............................................................................................................. 5-130
Drive System............................................................................................................... 5-131
Pickup Motor............................................................................................................... 5-131
Feed Motor.................................................................................................................. 5-132
Timing Belt/Pulley....................................................................................................... 5-133
Document Feeding System......................................................................................... 5-137
Pickup Roller Unit........................................................................................................ 5-137
5-5
Pickup Roller/Separation Roller.................................................................................. 5-138
Separation Plate/Separation Pad................................................................................ 5-140
Upper Registration Roller............................................................................................ 5-141
Lower Registration Roller............................................................................................ 5-142
Delivery Reversing Roller (upper) / Reverse Guide Unit............................................. 5-148
Read Roller 1.............................................................................................................. 5-153
Read Roller 2.............................................................................................................. 5-158
Platen Roller................................................................................................................ 5-163
Delivery Reversing Roller (lower)................................................................................ 5-168
Document Tray............................................................................................................ 5-177
Electrical System......................................................................................................... 5-179
Inner Sensor of Feed Unit........................................................................................... 5-179
Document Width Volume............................................................................................ 5-185
Cover Open/Closed Sensor........................................................................................ 5-186
Document Set Sensor................................................................................................. 5-186
Document Length sensor............................................................................................ 5-187
Pressurization Solenoid.............................................................................................. 5-188
5-6
5.2.1 COVERS
�
Cover TX side F
(Page5-10)
Cover platen
(Page5-8)
Cover front upper

(Page5-14)
Cover panel top

Cover left top (Page5-14)
(Page5-12) Cover speaker
(Page5-19)
Cover side L sub

(Page5-16)
Cover tray
Cover L
(Page5-18)
(Page5-16)
Guide outer
Tray document (Page5-11)
Cover TX side B
(Page5-9)
Cover back top

Cover right top (Page5-15)
(Page5-13)
Plate printer B
(Page5-8)
Plate printer A
(Page5-16)
Cover back side

Cover side R
(Page5-17)
(Page5-17)
5-7
PLATE PRINTER B
1. Remove one Plate printer B mounting screw and then remove the PLATE PRINTER B.
2. Disconnect the connector from the PCB SCANNER.
Note: ADF models (MFX-2720, MFX-2320 and MFX-2020) have one connector.
RADF models (MFX-2725 and MFX-2325) have two connectors.
PCB scanner
ADG01
1) Plate printer B
Ground wire
Note: When mounting the Plate printer B, pay attention not to allow the Plate printer B to pinch the
Harness.
COVER PLATEN
1. Remove the Plate printer B. Page 5-8
2. Open the Cover platen.
3. Raise the Cover platen, incline it, release the hinge tab, and then remove the COVER PLATEN.
Cover platen
Hinge
Tab
5-8
COVER TX SIDE B
2. Remove two Cover TX side B mounting screws.
AFF01
AFF01 2)
2)
3. Close the Cover platen.

4. Open the Guide outer.
5. Release three locking tabs, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE B.
Cover TX side B
Guide outer
5-9
COVER TX SIDE F
2. Remove one Cover TX side F mounting screw.
AFF01
2)

5. Release the locking tab, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE F.
Cover TX side F
Guide outer
5-10
GUIDE OUTER
1. Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-10
2. Remove the GUDE OUTER.
Guide outer
5-11
COVER LEFT TOP
2. Remove two Cover left top mounting screws.
3. Raise the Cover left top, release the two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER LEFT TOP.
Cover left top
ADG04
2)
5-12
COVER RIGHT TOP
2. Remove two Cover right top mounting screws.
3. Raise the Cover right top, release the two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER RIGHT TOP.
Cover right top
ADG04
2)
5-13
COVER FRONT UPPER
2. Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-12
3. Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-13
4. Remove four caps and mounting screws.
5. Remove the Cover front upper together with the panel.
Cap screw
Cover front upper
ADG01
4)
Cover panel top
6. Turn over the Cover front top, and then disconnect the connector.
7. Remove three Cover front upper mounting screws at backside of the Panel top front, and then
remove the COVER FRONT UPPER.
Cover panel top

AFF01
7)
Cover front upper
5-14
COVER BACK TOP
1. Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-8
4. Remove three Cover size H mounting screws, and then remove the Cover size H.
ADG04
4)
Cover size H
5. Remove four Cover back top mounting screws, and then remove the COVER BACK TOP by
spreading its right and left.
Cover back top
ADG04
4)
5-15
PLATE PRINTER A
2. Remove eleven Plate printer A mounting screws, and then remove the PLATE PRINTER A.
ADG01
2)
Plate printer A
COVER L
1. Remove two Cover side L sub mounting screws, and then remove the Cover side L sub.
2. Remove five Cover L mounting screws, and then remove the COVER L.
ADG04�
2)
ADG04�
1)
Cover side L sub

Cover L
5-16
COVER SIDE R
1. Remove three Cover side R mounting screws.
2. Release two tabs, and then remove the COVER SIDE R.
ADG04
1)
Cover side R
COVER BACK SIDE

1. Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-16
2. Remove three Cover back side mounting screws, and then remove the COVER BACK SIDE R.
ADG04�
2) Cover back side
5-17
COVER TRAY
1. Remove the Cover L. Page 5-16
2. Remove two Cover tray upper mounting screws.
3. Release the locking tab, and then remove the Cover tray upper.
ADG04�
2)
Cover tray upper
4. Open the Cover front, and then remove the COVER TRAY.
Cover tray
Cover front
5-18
COVER SPEAKER
1. Open the Cover front and the Cover jam access.
2. Remove one Cover speaker mounting screw.
3. Release two tabs, and then remove the COVER SPEAKER.
Cover speaker
ADG04�
2)
Cover front Cover jam access
5-19
5.2.2 PCBS
PCB Inverter
(Page 5-28)
PCB CCD
(Page 5-27)
PCB Panel B
(Page 5-22)
PCB Panel A
(Page 5-22)
PCB PSU PCB LPH

(Page 5-35) (Page 5-26)
PCB ADF
(Page 5-21)
PCB CONN MOT

(Page 5-25)
PCB Scanner
PCB Duplex (Page 5-33)
(Page 5-84)
PCB PRT
(Page 5-32)
PCB Bpsize
PCB NCU
(Page 5-36)
(Page 5-31)
PCB Main
(Page 5-29)
PCB Voice
PCB PSU HV (Page 5-30)
(Page 5-34)
5-20
PCB ADF
1. Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-9
2. Disconnect the seven connectors.
3. Remove two PCB ADF mounting screws, and then remove the PCB ADF.
AFF01
3)
PCB ADF
5-21
PCB PANEL A / PANEL B
3. Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-14
4. Remove the Cover panel top. Page 5-14
5. Remove ten PCB PANEL A / PANEL B mounting screws, and then remove the PCB panel A and
PCB panel B.
6. Remove the PCB PANEL A and the PCB PANEL B from the Panel top.
AFF 01
PCB panel A 5)
PCB panel B
Cover panel top
Note: The figure shows the panel being turned over.
7. Remove the PCB PANEL A and the PCB PANEL B.
PCB panel A
PCB panel B
5-22
LCD
4. Remove the Cover panel top. Page 5-14
5. Remove the PCB PANEL A. Page 5-22
6. Disconnect the connector, and then remove two Film harnesses.
7. Release three locking tabs, and then remove the LCD.
Assy LCD
PCB panel A
8. Spread the side of the Supporter LCD, slide and raise the LCD, and then remove the LCD.
LCD
Supporter LCD
5-23
Note: When mounting the Assy LCD, tuck the Film harness inside.
Assy LCD
PCB panel A
5-24
PCB CONN MOT
4. Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-15
5. Disconnect the connector.
6. Remove two PCB CONN MOT mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CONN MOT.
ADG01�
6)
PCB CONN MOT
5-25
PCB LPH
1. Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-16
3. Remove the Cover tray upper. Page 5-18
4. Remove the Cover tray. Page 5-18
5. Disconnect the connector, and then pull out the Harness.
6. Remove two Duct side mounting screws.
7. Remove two Duct side mounting projection, and then remove the Duct side.
8. Remove the connector of the thermistor.
Duct side
9. Remove two Case shield mounting screws, and then remove the Case shield.
10. Disconnect one connector, and then remove two Film harnesses.
Note: When removing the film harnesses, be sure to unlock them.
11. Remove two PCB LPH mounting screws, and then remove the PCB LPH.
Case shild
PCB LPH
5-26
PCB CCD
4. Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-15
5. Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-54
6. Remove the Pane. Page 5-55
7. Remove three Cover scanner mounting screws, and then remove the Cover scanner.
Cover scanner
ADG01
7)
8. Remove the Film harness.

9. Remove two PCB CCD mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CCD.
ADG01
9)
PCB CCD
5-27
PCB INVERTER
7. Remove the Cover scanner. Page 5-27
8. Disconnect the two connectors.
9. Remove one Bracket inverter mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket PCB inverter.
ADG01
9)
Bracket inverter
10. Remove two Inverter mounting screws, and then remove the PCB INVERTER.
Bracket inverter
ADG01�
10) PCB Inverter
5-28
PCB MAIN
1. Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-16
2. Disconnect the connected from the PCB MAIN.
Note: Do not disconnect one connector (P22). (Otherwise, the backup memory is deleted).
3. Remove five PCB MAIN mounting screws, and then remove the PCB MAIN.
ADG01�
3)
PCB main
P22
Note: When replacing the PCB MAIN, disconnect all the connectors.
5-29
PCB VOICE
2. Remove two PCB VOICE mounting screws.
3. Remove one spacer, and then remove the PCB VOICE.
Note: Do not disconnect the connector.
PCB voice
ADG01�
2)
Note: When replacing the PCB VOICE, disconnect the connectors from the PCB MAIN.
5-30
PCB NCU
2. Remove the Cover side L. Page 5-16
3. Remove two Bracket shield D mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket shield D.
Bracket shild D
ADG01�
3)
4. Remove the PCB MAIN. Page 5-29

5. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB NCU.
6. Remove one mounting screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire.
7. Remove three PCB NCU mounting screws, and then remove the PCB NCU.
ADG01�
7)
ADG01�
6)
PCB NCU
Ground wire
5-31
PCB PRT
2. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB PRT.
3. Remove two PCB PRT mounting screws, and then remove the PCB PRT.
PCB PRT
ADG01�
3)
5-32
PCB SCANNER
2. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB SCANNER.
3. Remove two PCB SCANNER mounting screws, and then remove the PCB SCANNER.
PCB scanner
ADG01�
3)
5-33
PCB PSU HV
2. Remove four PCB PSU HV mounting screws, and then remove the PCB PSU HV.
3. Disconnect the three connectors.
ADG01�
2)
PCB PSU HV
5-34
PCB PSU
3. Remove two PCB PSU mounting screws, and then pull out the PCB PSU.
4. Disconnect the three connectors.
ADG01�
3)
PCB PSU
5-35
PCB BPSIZE
1. Remove the Tray MP. Page 5-74
2. Remove two the Tray A-2 MP mounting screws.
3. Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Tray A-2 MP.
4. Remove two PCB BPSIZE mounting screws, and then remove the PCB BPSIZE.
6. Remove the Knob dial.
Tray A-2 MP
AFF01
2)
AFF06
4)
PCB bpsize
Knob dial
Note: When mounting the Knob dial, fit the Knob dial projection in the groove of the PCB BPSIZE.
5-36
5.2.3 ADF SECTION (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)
Note: See “5.2.6 RADF section” for MFX-2725 and MFX-2225
TRAY DOCUMENT
3. Remove one connector.
4. Raise the Tray document.
Tray document
5. Pass the connector vertically through the Platen cover hole, and then remove the TRAY
DOCUMENT.
Tray document
5-37
SENSOR (DL1)
1. Remove the Tray document. Page 5-37
2. Turn over the Tray document, remove three mounting screws, release five locking tabs, and then
remove the Tray document B.
AFF01
2)
Tray document B
Tray document A
3. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR (DL1).
Sensor (DL1)
Note: When mounting the Sensor, pay attention to its mounting direction.
5-38
SENSOR (DW1) / SENSOR (DW2)
1. Remove the Tray document. Page 5-37
2. Remove the Tray document B. Page 5-38 Procedure 2
3. Remove the Sensor stoppers.
4. Disconnect the connectors, and then remove the SENSOR (DW1)/SENSOR (DW2).
Sensor (DW2) Sensor (DW1)
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
5-39
ROLLER SEPARATOR
1. Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-11
2. Remove five Guide outer mounting screws, and the remove the Guide outer A.
AFF01
2)
Guide outer A
Roller separator
3. Remove five E-rings of the Roller separator, and then remove the gear and bearings.
ANB02 Bearing D6 8
3) 3)
ANB03
Bearing D6 3)
3)
Gear 27 0.8 D
ANB03
3)
ANB03
3)
Bearing D6
3)

5-40
4. Slide the Roller separator, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR.
Roller separater
ROLLER PRESS
1. Remove the Guide outer A. Page 5-40 Procedure 2
2. Remove one Holder register mounting screw, and then remove the Holder register.
3. Remove the ROLLER PRESS.
Roller press B
AFF01
2)
Holder register
Note: When mounting the Roller press, pay attention to the shaft mounting direction.
5-41
GUIDE INNER
1. Open the Cover platen, and then remove one screw.
ADG01
1)

6. Disconnect the four connectors.
7. Remove four Guide inner mounting screws, and then remove the GUIDE INNER.
AFF01
7)
Guide inner
AFF01 AFF01
7) 7)
Ground wire
5-42
FRAME MOTOR
5. Remove the Guide inner. Page 5-42
6. Remove the clamp, remove one Plate drive mounting screw, and then remove the Plate drive.
7. Remove three Frame motor mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME MOTOR.
Clutch(MG)
ADG01
ADG01 7)
7)
Clamp
Flame motor
ADG01
ADG04 7)
6) Plate drive
8. Remove one Sensor mounting screw, and then remove the Sensor.
9. Remove the E-ring and gears.
ADG01
8)
Sensor (TXIL) ANB02

9)
Gear 28/36
Gear 34/75
Flame motor
Note: Mount the Plate drive in position after mounting the Guide inner to the Cover platen.
5-43
CLUTCH (MG)
6. Remove the Frame motor. Page 5-43
7. Remove the CLUTCH (MG).
9. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the shaft.
Gear 15 0.5 D
Bearing D6
Shaft clutch A
Clutch (MG)
AVA01
9)
Bearing D6
5-44
CLUTCH (CL)
7. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH (CL).
Clutch (CL)
AVA01
7)
5-45
ROLLER EXIT
7. Remove the Clutch (MG). Page 5-44
8. Remove three Spring P earth mounting screws, and the remove the Spring P earth.
Spring P earth
AFF01
8)
9. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearings.

10. Remove the ROLLER EXIT.
11. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the gear and bearings.
ANB02 Gear 37 0.5 D

9)
Bearing D6
9) Roller exit
Bearing D6
11)
ANB03
11)
5-46
ROLLER FEED
7. Remove the Clutch (MG) and Clutch (CL). Page 5-44, 5-45
8. Remove the Spring P earth. Page 5-46
9. Remove the Plate document press.
10. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearing.
Plate document press

9)
Bearing
10)
ANB03
10)
11. Remove the gear, and then remove the pin.

12. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearing.
AQA04
11)
Bearing
AVA02 12)
12)
Gear 76 0.5
5-47
13. Remove four Frame drive mounting screws, and then remove the Frame drive.
Note: Spring P FG B may not be mounted on your machine according to the production lot.
14. Remove the ROLLER FEED.
Roller feed 14)
Frame drive
AFF01
13)
Spring P FG B
5-48
SENSOR (DS1)
2. Remove one Sensor (DS1) mounting screw, and then remove the SENSOR (DS1).
Sensor (DS1)
ADG01
2)
4. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (DS1)
4)
Plate sensor
Sensor stopper
4)
5-49
SENSOR (TXIL)
2. Remove one Plate sensor open mounting screw, and then remove the Plate sensor open.
ADG01
2)
Plate sensor open
Sensor stopper
Plate sensor open
Sensor (TXIL)
5-50
SENSOR (DS2) / SENSOR (DRS)
2. Remove two Sensor cover mounting screws.
3. Remove the Cover sensor.
Note: Put a small screwdriver into the center and remove the Cover sensor.
AFF01
2)
Cover sensor
4. Remove each one of Sensor (DS2)/Sensor (DRS) mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR
(DS2)/SENSOR (DRS).
5. Disconnect the connectors.
AFF01
2)
Sensor (DRS)
AFF01
2)
Sensor (DS2)
6. Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR (DS2)/SENSOR (DRS).
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
Plate sensor DRS
Plate sensor DS2
Sensor (DRS)
Sensor (DS2)
5-51
PIECE SEPARATOR
2. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the PIECE SEPARATOR.
Piece separator
5-52
HINGE
2. Remove three Hinge mounting screws, and then remove the HINGE.
AHB01
2)
AHB01
Hinge (L) 2)
Hinge (R)
Note: When mounting the Hinges, pay attention to the mounting position.
Mount the Hinge (L) in a position where the Hinge comes in contact with the Cover platen.
Align the Hinge (R) with the graduation and the Cover platen graduation.
Hinge (L) Hinge (R)
Note: Cover platen angle can be adjusted with the position of the Hinge (R) graduation.
5-53
5.2.4 FBS SECTION
CONTACT GLASS
3. Remove the CONTACT GLASS.
Contact glass C
Note: Mount the Contact glass so that the face lined with film comes to upper left side.
Handle the fragile Contact glass with due care.
5-54
PANE
5. Remove the Cover size V.
6. Remove the PANE.
Cover size V
Pane
Note: Handle the fragile Pane with due care.
5-55
LAMP
8. Remove the Blind sheet.
9. Move the Carriage to the Lamp replacing position (notch), and then remove two Lamp mounting
screws.
10. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the LAMP.
ADG01�
9) Blind sheet
Lamp
Holder lamp B
Note: When mounting the Lamp, pass the Harness below the Holder lamp B projection.
5-56
CARRIAGE A
8. Remove the Blind sheet. Page 5-56
9. Disconnect the connector from between the FPC harness and the Inverter.
10. Remove one FPC harness mounting screw, and then remove the FPC harness.
AFF01�
10)
Inverter
Assy Lamp-CBL
5-57
12. Move the Carriage to the replacing position (notch).
13. Tuck the tab of the Guide FPC center inside, and then raise the Guide FPC out of position.
14. Pull out the FPC harness from the Carriage B hole.
Guide FPC
FPC harness
Note: When puling out the FPC harness from the Carriage hole, pay attention not to damage the
film.
15. Put a screwdriver into the hole at the right side of the replacing position, and then remove the
screw at the center of the Holder belt AB.
16. Remove the screw at the center of the Holder belt AF.
AEH01
15)
Holder belt AB
AEH01
16)
Holder belt AF
5-58
17. Remove the Belt from the locking tabs of the Holder belt AB and the Holder belt AF.
Holder belt AB
Holder belt AF
Belt Belt
18. Move the Carriage A askew, and then remove the CARRIAGE A.
Carriage A
Note: Magnets are attached at the both ends of the Carriage A.
5-59
MIRROR A
9. Remove the Lamp. Page 5-56
10.Remove the Carriage A. Page 5-57
11. Remove the Clamp mirrors AB, AF.
12. Remove the MIRROR A.
Mirror A
12)
Clamp mirror AB
11)
Clamp mirror AF
11)
Note: Pull out the Clamp mirror by pulling the spring to the Mirror side.
Note: Mount the Mirror A so that its surface faces upwards and the side C downwards.
5-60
CARRIAGE B
9. Remove the Carriage A. Page 5-57
10. Remove two Holder belt B mounting screws.
ADG01
10)
Holder belt B Holder belt B

10) Carriage B 10)
11. Remove the Belts from the Holder belt B locking tabs.
Holder belt B Holder belt B
Belt Belt
5-61
12. Move the Carriage B askew, and then remove the CARRIAGE B.
Carriage B
5-62
MIRROR B / MIRROR C
9. Remove the Carriage A. Page 5-57
10. Remove the Carriage B. Page 5-61
11. Remove the four Clamp mirrors B.
Clamp mirror B
Mirror B
Mirror C
Lot number Clamp mirror B
Lot number
Note: When mounting the Mirrors, pay attention to their top and bottom faces. The face marked
with lot number is the bottom side. (The face without mark is the top side).
Note: Pay attention to the mounting position.

Mirror B comes on the upper side.
Mirror C comes on the lower side. (The Mirror C is 2 mm larger than the Mirror B).
Mount the mirrors so that their surfaces face each other as shown in the figure.
5-63
MIRROR CARRIAGE ALIGNMENT
1. Put the Carriage A askew in the Frame scanner, and then move it to the replacing position (notch).
2. Put the Belt through the Holder belt AF and the Holder belt AB, and then lock it temporarily.
Holder belt AB
Holder belt AF
AFF01�
2)
Frame scanner
3. Move the Carriage A to the position where the projections of its both ends come in contact with the
right side inner wall of the chassis.
4. Put the Carriage B askew in the Frame scanner.
Holder belt B
Holder belt B
Frame scaner
5-64
5. To mount the Carriage A, put a screwdriver in the Frame scanner’s right-side holes and tighten the
Holder belt AF and Holder belt AB mounting screws.
6. Tighten the Holder belt B of the Carriage B.
5-65
SENSOR (HOME)
8. Remove the Cover front lower. Page 5-72
10. Remove the Sensor (Home) stopper, and the remove the SENSOR (HOME).
Carriage A
Sensor stopper
Sensor (Home)
Note: When carrying out the work, manually move the Carriage A to the center.
5-66
SENSOR (BSS)
7. Remove one Sensor (BSS) mounting screw.
8. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR (BSS).
AFF01
7)
Sensor (BSS)
5-67
FBS MOTOR
5. Remove four Bracket hinge R mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket hinge R.
6. Remove the Harness from the Bracket hinge R clamp, and then disconnect the connector.
ADG04�
Bracket hinge R 5)
7. Remove the Spring.

8. Remove three Bracket motor mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket motor.
ADG04�
8) Spring C tension A
Bracket motor
5-68
9. Remove two Bracket motor mounting screws, and then remove the FBS MOTOR.
Motor
Bracket motor
AJD02
9)
Note: Mount the Bracket motor temporarily by screws. Apply the Spring in position and tighten up
the screws.
5-69
SENSOR (APS) / SENSOR (BIS)
5. Remove four Bracket hinge R mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket hinge R.
ADG04
5)
Brown
Red
Bracket hinge L
7. Remove the Sensor (APS)/ Sensor (BIS) stopper, and then remove the Sensor (APS)/ Sensor
(BIS).
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
Sensor (APS)
Sensor (BIS)
5-70
SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS
2. Remove the release coated paper of the double-adhesive tape of the Sheet document press.
3. Put the Sheet document press on the panel with its adhesive side facing up.
4. Place the Sheet document press 1 mm away from the document reference position.
6. Open the Cover platen, and then apply the Sheet document press firmly.
Sheet document press
1mm
1mm
5-71
FRAME SCANNER
5. Remove three Cover front lower screws, and then release three Cover front lower locking tabs.
6. Release one right locking tab, and then remove the Cover front lower.
Note: Mount the Cover front lower in the reverse order.
7. Remove two mounting screws.
Cover front lower
ADG03�
7)
ADG01�
5)

10. Disconnect the five connectors from the PCB SCANNER, and then remove one film harness.
PCB scanner
5-72
11. Remove two Frame scanner mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME SCANNER.
Frame scanner
ADG01�
11)
5-73
5.2.5 PRINTER SECTION
TRAY MP
3. Remove two mounting screws.
4. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Piece B and Piece F.
5. Remove the TRAY MP.
Pice B
Pice F
Tray MP
5-74
COVER JAM ACCESS
3. Remove two screws and Cover cam F nad Cover cam B.
Cover cam B
Cover cam F
4. Remove one screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire.

5. Open the Cover jam access.
6. Remove two knob lock jacks, and then remove the COVER JAM ACCESS.
Knob lock JAC

ADG01
4)
Knob lock JAC
Cover jam acsses
Knob lock JAC
5-75
ROLLER TRANSFER
2. Remove one screw and the ground wire on the Guide transfer.
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the Guide transfer JAC.
Guide transfer JAC
4. Remover two Sheet stoppers.

5. Release four locking tabs, and then remove the Guide transfer B.
Guide transfer B
Sheet stopper
Sheet stopper
Guide transfer JAC
6. Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket transfer B and the Bracket transfer A.
7. Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER.
8. Remove the Roller gap B and the Bracket transfer B.
9. Remove the gear, the Roller gap A and the Bracket transfer F.
Roller gap B
Bracket transfer B Roller transfer
Bracket transfer F
Roller gap A
Gear 25H 0.6
5-76
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A
2. Remove four Guide transfer mounting screws, and then remove Guide transfer.
Guide transfer
AFF01
4)
3. Remove four Guide duplex Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Guide duplex Assy.
AFA07 Guide duplex Assy

5)
5-77
4. Remove the belt.
5. Remove two plastic rings, and then remove the Flange pulleys and the gears.
6. Remove two plastic rings.
7. Remove four bearings, and then remove the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX.
Belt AVA01
7) Flange pulley
Gear 20/25P Roller feed duplex A
Bearing
AVA01
7)
Frange pulley
Gear 20/25P
Bearing
Bearing
Bearing AVA01
8)
Note: When mounting the Roller feed duplex, pass the bearings over the springs.
Bearing Bearing
Spring T FG duplex
5-78
SENSOR (DUP)
2. Remove the Guide transfer. Page 5-77
3. Remove the Guide duplex Assy. Page 5-77
Guide duplex Assy
Sensor stopper
Sensor (DUP)
5-79
SENSOR (J1-OP)
3. Remove the PCB DUPLEX. Page 5-84
4. Remove one Bracket sensor jack mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket sensor jack.
ADG01�
2)
Bracket sensor jac
Sensor (J1-OP)
Sensor stopper
5-80
MOTOR 1
3. Remove four Motor 1 mounting screws, and then remove the Motor 1.
Motor 1
AJD01�
3)
MOTOR 2
3. Remove four Motor 2 mounting screws, and then remove the Motor 2.
Motor 2
AJD01�
3)
5-81
CLUTCH (PAPER REGIST)
2. Remove the PCB PSU HV. Page 5-34
4. Remove three Motor bracket mounting screws, and then remove the Motor bracket.
Motor bracket
ADG01�
4)
5. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.

Clutch
AVA02
6)
5-82
CLUTCH (PAPER FEED)
3. Remove the Motor bracket. Page 5-82
5. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.
AVA01�
5)
Clutch
5-83
PCB DUPLEX
2. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB DUPLEX.
3. Remove two PCB DUPLEX mounting screws, and then remove the PCB DUPLEX.
ADG01�
3)
PCB duplex
FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX

4. Remove three Frame drive unit duplex mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE
UNIT DUPLEX.
PCB duplex
ADG01�
4)
Frame drive unit duplex
5-84
MOTOR (Dupex)
Note: The Motor can be removed with the Frame drive unit duplex being mounted to the machine.
3. Remove two Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.
ACE01
3)
Motor
CLUTCH (Duplex)
Note: The Clutch can be removed with the Frame drive unit duplex being mounted to the machine.
3. Remove one Bracket mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket and bearing.
4. Remove the CLUTCH.
Bearing
Clutch
Bracket
ADG01
3)
5-85
SENSOR (THRM)
1. Remove the Cover printer A. Page 5-16
3. Remove one Sensor mounting screw, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (THRM)
AFF01�
3)
5-86
FRAME DRIVE A
2. Remove the PCB DUPLEX, and then remove Frame drive unit duplex. Page 5-84
3. Remove the Motor 1. Page 5-81
4. Remove the Motor 2. Page 5-81
6. Remove the Motor bracket. Page 5-82
7. Remove the Clutch (paper regist). Page 5-82
8. Remove the Clutch (paper feed). Page 5-83
9. Remove two Cover PCB HV mounting screws, and then remove the Cover PCB.
Note: When removing the Cover PCB HV, pay attention not to allow the spring to drop and get lost.
Spring
Cover PCB HV
ADG04�
9)
5-87
11. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the Flange.
12. Remove the belt.
Belt
Flange
AVA02�
11)
�
13. Remove one plastic ring.
14. Remove six Frame drive A mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE A.
15. Remove the bearing.
Drive A assy
ADG01�
14)
Bearing
AVA02�
13)
5-88
SPEAKER
1. Remove the Cover speaker. Page 5-19
2. Remove one Holder speaker mounting screw, and then remove the Holder speaker.
ADG04�
2)
Holder speaker
4. Remove two Holder mounting screws, and then remove the Holder.
5. Remove the SPEAKER.
AFF01
4)
Holder
Speaker
5-89
SENSOR (INTERLOCK)
2. Remove the Speaker. Page 5-89
4. Remove one screw.
5. Release one locking tab, and then remove the Holder IL.
Holder IL
ADG04
4)
6. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Plate sensor IL.
7. Remove the SENSOR.
Plate sensor IL
Sensor (Inter lock)
5-90
FUSER UNIT
2. Remove two Fuser unit mounting screws.
3. Open the Cover guide exit, and then remove the FUSER UNIT.
Cover guide exit
Fuser unit
ABF02�
2)
ABF02�
2)
5-91
EXIT ASSY
3. Remove the Bracket speaker. Page 5-89
4. Remove three screws.
AFF01
4)
F. G. wire
ADG01
4)

6. Remove the PCB DUPLEX, and then remove Frame drive unit duplex. Page 5-84
7. Remove the Frame drive unit duplex.
AFF01�
7)
5-92
9. Remove the Cover back side. Page 5-17
10. Remove one Cover speaker back mounting screw, and then remove the Cover speaker back.
Cover speaker back
ADG04�
10)
11. Open the Cover guide exit, and then remove three Exit Assy mounting screws.
12. Remove the EXIT ASSY.
Cover guide exit
ADG04�
11)
Exit Assy
5-93
ROLLER EXIT A
1. Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-92
2. Remove one screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire.
3. Remove one screw, and then remove the Plate terminal and the Spring P.
Exit Assy
Plate terminal
AFF01�
3)
F. G. wire
AFF06� Spring p FG resister

2)
4. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Bearing.

5. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear clutch.
7. Remove the ROLLER EXIT A.
Gear clutch
AVA04�
5) Bearing
AVA01�
6)
Roller exit A Bearing

AVA01�
4)
5-94
ROLLER EXIT B
1. Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-92
2. Disconnect the Ground wire. Page 5-94
3. Remove the Plate terminal and the Spring P. Page 5-94
5. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear.
6. Remove the Bearing.
7. Remove the ROLLER EXIT B.
Gear 20
AVA04�
5)
Bearing
Bearing Roller exit B

AVA01�
4)
�
5-95
SENSOR (SWBK)
4. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket sensor.
Bracket sensor
5. Remove the Sensor plate, and then remove the SENSOR.

Sensor (SWBK)
Sensor stopper
5-96
SENSOR (PDS)
4. Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket sensor.
Bracket sensor
�
5. Remove the Sensor plate, and then remove the SENSOR.

Sensor (PDS)
Sensor stopper
5-97
LED
1. Open the Cover front.
3. Return the Knob, and then pull out the LED unit.
4. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the LED.
LED
Knob LED LED unit

�
5. Remove two Film harnesses.

Note: When removing the Film harnesses, unlock them.
Harness
Plate FG LED Plate FG LED
LED
Note: Mount the LED so that the Plate FG LED would touch the inside wall of the LED. Otherwise it
may be damaged.
LED
Plate FG LED �
5-98
ROLLER REGISTER
3. Remove the Frame drive A. Page 5-87
4. Remove one screw, and then remove the Spring P.
5. Remove the Spring C (yellow).
Spring C resister rear
Spring P FG resister
ADG01�
4)
�
6. Remove the right Bearing regist D8.

7. Remove the left Bearing regist D8, and then remove the Regist Assy.
Bearing regist D8
Regist Assy
Bearing regist D8
�
5-99
8. Remove the two Bearing regist D8’s.
9. Remove the gear.
10. Remove the Knob lever regist and the Knob lever regist B.
11. Remove the E-ring.
12. Remove the Guide paper.
Bearing regist D8
Knob lever regist B
Gear 16 regist
Roller regist
ANB05
11)
Knob lever regist
Guide paper
Spring C resister front

Bearing regist D8 �
5-100
ROLLER PICKUP
4. Remove the Cover jam access. Page 5-75
5. Remove two MP guide Assy mounting screws, and then remove the MP guide Assy.
ADG01
5)
MP guide Assy
�
6. Remove the Bracket shaft MP (F) and the Bearing.

8. Remove the Bearing, and then remove the Roller pickup MP.
9. Remove the Cam flapper MP.
Roller pickup MP
Bearing
Cam flapper MP
Bearing
AVA01
7)
�
5-101
10. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the Roller.
ANA07
10)
Roller
Note: When mounting the Roller, pay attention to the mounting direction.
When the Roller is turned clockwise, it is locked. (The Shaft turns.)
When the Roller is turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked. (The Shaft does not turn.)
FREE
Shaft LOCK
Roller
�
5-102
PAD PRESSURE MP
5. Remove the MP guide Assy. Page 5-101
6. Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP.
Pad pressure MP
5-103
SENSOR (PES BS)
5. Release two hooks, and then remove the Flapper MP.
Note: Raise the Flapper MP and then release the hooks.
Flapper MP

Sensor stopper
Sensor (PES BS)
5-104
SENSOR (PSS)
2. Remove one Bracket PSS mounting screw.
3. Hold up the Guide paper and the Feeler PSS, and then remove the Bracket PSS.
Guide paper
Feeler PSS
Bracket PSS
ADG04�
2)
Sensor stopper
Sensor (PSS)
Note: When mounting the Sensor, pay attention not to allow the Feeler PSS to touch the wire
Harness.
5-105
SOLENOID
3. Remove one Bracket solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket solenoid.
4. Pull out one connector.
5. Remove the Harness from the clamp, and then pull it out through the hole.
Bracket solenoid MP
ADG01�
3)
6. Remove one Solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the SOLENOID.
ADG01
6)
Solenoid
5-106
FAN
4. Remove the Filter ozone.
6. Release two locking tabs, and then remove the FAN.
Fan
Filter ozone
�
7. Remove the Holder fan.
Holder fan
Fan
5-107
CLUTCH (SCREW)
3. Remove the Bracket shield D. Page 5-31
5. Remove the PCB VOICE. Page 5-30
6. Remove the PCB NCU. Page 5-31
7. Remove one Bracket connector mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket connector.
Bracket connector
ADG01�
7)
�
8. Remove six Case shield mounting screws, and then remove the Case shield.
�
Case shilde
ADG01�
8)
5-108
11. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.
Gear 20/40
AVA01
9)
AVA01 Clutch
11)
5-109
MOTOR (DC)
7. Remove the Bracket connector. Page 5-108
8. Remove the Case shield. Page 5-108
9. Disconnect one connector.
10. Remove three Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.
Motor (DC)
ABF05
10)
5-110
SENSOR (TOS)
7. Remove the Bracket connector. Page 5-108
8. Remove the Case shield. Page 5-108 Procedure 9
9. Remove the Clutch (screw). Page 5-109 Procedure 11
11. Remove the Bearing.
12. Remove two plastic rings, and then remove two Pulley guides.
13. Remove the belt.
14. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Pulley gear.
15. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the bearing.
Bearing
Gear 32 0.8 oneway
AVA01�
10)
Pulley guide
AVA01�
12)
Bearing
AVA01�
AVA01� 15)
14)
Pulley gear 32/60
AVA01�
12) Pulley guide
�
Note: When mounting the Gear which was removed in 10, pay attention to the mounting direction.
When the Gear is turned clockwise, it is locked. When turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked.
FREE LOCK
5-111
16. Remove six Frame drive mounting screws, and then remove the Frame drive F.
Frame drive F
ADG01�
16)
AFF01�
16)
ADG01�
16) �
17. Remove four Chassis pillar mounting screws, and then remove the Chassis pillar.
Note: There is no need to remove the harness.
ADG01�
17)
Chassis pillar
5-112
18. Remove four Hopper Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Hopper Assy.
Hopper Assy
ADG04�
18)
19. Remove one Bracket mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket enpty.
Bracket enpty AFF01�

19)
21. Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and the remove the SENSOR.
ACE01
21)
Sensor (TOS)
5-113
SENSOR (CART)
3. Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-18
4. Remove the Spring C CT SW, and then remove the Piece CT SW.
Piece CT SW
Spring C CT SW
�

Sensor (CART)
Sensor stopper
5-114
ROLLER RETARD
1. Pull out the Cassette.
2. Remove two Duct cable mounting screws, and then remove the Duct cable.
Duct cable ADG01�

2)
3. Disconnect one connector.

4. Remove two Pickup Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Pickup Assy.
Pickup Assy
ADG01�
4)
5-115
5. Remove two Retard unit mounting screws, and then remove the Retard unit.
ADG01
5)
Retard unit
6. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Shaft retard.
7. Remove the Guide retard.
Guide retard
Retard
ANB01
6)
Spring retard
Shaft retard
Base retard
5-116
8. Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER RETARD.
AVA01
8)
Roller retard
Bracket retard �
Note: When you reassemble the Pickup Assy, be sure that the notch of the Shaft-Pickup couples to
the Pickup Assy correctly. If not, the first paper picked up from that cassette jams. But after the
first paper jam, the shaft couples to the assy and the paper will not jam after it.
5-117
ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE
2. Remove the Duct cable. Page 5-115
3. Remove the Pickup Assy. Page 5-115
4. Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-116 Procedure 5
5. Remove two Guide A pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Guide A pickup.
6. Remove four Cover pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Cover pickup.
ADG01
6)
ADG01
5) Cover pickup
Guide A pickup
AFF01
6)

8. Remove two Bearings, and then remove the Roller pickup unit.
AVA01�
7)
Roller pickup unit
Bearing
Bearing
AVA01�
7)
5-118
REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATE
2. Remove the Feeler.
3. Remove the Spring and the Collar from the Bracket.
4. Remove the Roller separator unit.
AVA01
1)
Roller separate unit Spring
Collar separate
Bracket
Feller
AVA01
1) �
5. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATE.
Roller separate
AVA01
5)
5-119
REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP
2. Remove two Bearings.
3. Remove the Roller pickup unit.
AVA01
1)
Bearing
Bearing
AVA01
1) Roller pickup unit
�
4. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER PICKUP.
Roller pickup
AVA01
4) �
5-120
SENSOR (PES)
5. Remove the Guide A pickup. Page 5-118
6. Remove the Cover pickup. Page 5-118
7. Remove the Feeler.
Sensor (PES)
Sensor stopper
Feller
5-121
SENSOR (LIFT UP)
5. Remove the Guide A pickup. Page 5-118
6. Remove the Cover pickup. Page 5-118
Note: Push down the Pickup unit, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (Lift up)
Pickup unit
Sensor stopper
5-122
SENSOR (PSIZE)
3. Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (Psize)
5-123
ROLLER FEED
2. Remove the Cassette.
5. Remove the Sensor (PSIZE). Page 5-123
6. Remove one Holder cassette screw.
ADG01�
6)
�

8. Remove the Frame drive A. Page 5-87
9. Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the bearing.
10. Remove two plastic rings, and then remove the bearing.
11. Remove one Holder casette screw.
AFF01�
11)
Bearing
AVA01�
10)
Gear 17 0.8 ONEWAY

AVA01�
9) �
5-124
12. Remove the Holder cassette R with the Roller feed.
Holder cassette R
13. Remove one plastic ring.

14. Remove the bearing, and then remove the ROLLER FEED.
Roller feed
Bearing
AVA01�
13)
5-125
FILTER OZONE
3. Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-18
4. Remove the FILTER OZONE.
Filter ozone
5-126
CASE DUST
1. Open the Cover front.
3. Remove the Fuser unit. Page 5-91
4. Remove two Case dust screws.
AFF01�
4)
5. Remove the Case dust over the projection.
Case dust
5-127
5.2.6 RADF SECTION (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)
Note: See “5.2.3 Scanning section” for MFX-2700 and MFX-2200
Removing from the Host Machine

Feeder(Cover Platen)
1. Turn off the main power switch of the host machine.
2. Remove one Plate printer B mounting screw and then remove the PLATE PRINTER B.
3. Disconnect the connector from the PCB SCANNER.
Note: ADF models (MFX-2720, MFX-2320 and MFX-2020) have one connector.
RADF models (MFX-2725 and MFX-2325) have two connectors.
PCB scanner
ADG01
1) Plate printer B
Ground wire
4. Raise the Feeder(Cover Platen), incline it, release the hinge tab, and then remove the Feeder(Cover
Platen).
Cover platen
Hinge
Tab
5-128
External Covers
Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover
1. Open the feeder cover [1], and then remove the screw [2].
[2]
[1]
2. Remove the two screws [3], and then detach the front cover [4].
[4]
[3]
Rear Cover
Removing the Rear Cover
1. Open the feeder cover.
2. Move to the back of the machine, remove the two screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Note: Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released.
5-129
Feeder Cover
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
Removing the Feeder Cover

1. Remove the screw [1] and positioning pin [2], and then detach the feeder cover [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
5-130
Drive System
Pickup Motor
[1]
[2]
[3]
Removing the Pickup Motor

1. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the tension spring [2].
2. Remove the two screws [3], and then remove the pickup motor [4] together with the adjusting plate.
[1] [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5-131
Installing the Pickup Motor
1. Attach the tension spring [1] to the adjusting plate and motor base, and then install the motor in such a
manner that the motor pulley and the timing belt are engaged.
2. Install the pickup motor [3] together with the adjusting plate using two screws [2].
3. Connect the connector [4].
[4] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Feed Motor
[1]
[2]
[3]
Removing the Feed Motor

2. Remove the two screws [3], and then remove the feed motor [4] together with the adjusting plate.
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
5-132
Installing the Feed Motor
1. Install the feed motor in such a manner that the motor pulley is engaged with the timing belt, and then
tighten two screws [1] temporarily.
2. Attach the tension spring [2] to the adjusting plate and motor base, and then securely tighten the screws
tightened temporarily in step 1.
3. Connect the connector [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
Timing Belt/Pulley
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
5-133
[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
[2]
[3]
Removing the ADF Driver PCB

1. Disconnect all connectors from the ADF driver PCB. (10 connectors)
2. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the ADF driver PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
5-134
[1] [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]

[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
Removing the Timing Belt

1. Remove the screw [1], and then disconnect the ground cable [2].
[1] [2]
5-135
2. Disconnect the two sensor connectors [1].
3. Remove the harness from the harness guide [2].
4. Remove the screw [3], and remove the harness guide [2].
5. Remove the two screws [4], and then remove the metal plate [5].
6. Remove the four screws [6], and then remove the left hinge [7].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
7. Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the metal plate.
[1]
[1] [1]
8. Remove the timing belt [1].
[1]
5-136
Document Feeding System
Pickup Roller Unit
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[3]
[1] [2]
Removing the Pickup Roller Unit

1. Release the two hooks [1], and then detach the inner cover [2] of the feeder cover.
[1] [2] [1]
5-137
2. Remove the two resin rings [1] and the two bearings [2], and then remove the pickup roller unit [3].
[1] [2] [3] [2] [1]
Precaution about Pickup Roller Unit Installation

Note:
- Install the pickup roller unit with the stopper arm [1] at the front as shown below.
- Install the pickup roller unit with the stopper [2] at the rear as shown below.
[2]
[1]
Pickup Roller/Separation Roller

[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
5-138
[3]
[1] [2]
Removing the Pickup Roller Unit

[1] [2] [1]
2. Remove the two resin rings [1] and the two bearings [2], and then remove the pickup roller unit [3].
[1] [2] [3] [2] [1]
Removing the Pickup Roller and Separation Roller

1. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the drive gear [2].
[2] [1]
5-139
2. Remove the pickup roller [1].
3. Remove the E-ring [2], and then remove the separation roller [3].
[3] [1]
[2]
Separation Plate/Separation Pad

Removing the Separation Pad
2. Release the two hooks [1], and then remove the separation pad [2].
[1] [2]
5-140
Upper Registration Roller
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[3]
[1] [2]
5-141
Removing the Upper Registration Roller
[1] [2] [1]
2. Slide the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the upper registration roller [2].
Note: Do not remove the upper registration roller shaft holder [3] because it was factory-adjusted.
[2]
[3] [1]
Lower Registration Roller

[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
5-142
[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
[2]
[3]
Remove the rear cover with the two claws [3] released.

[1]
[2]
5-143
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]

[1] [2]

[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
5-144
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]
Removing the Document Tray

1. Remove the screw [1] at the front of the machine, and then remove the tray holder [2].
2. Remove the document tray [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
Removing the Feeding Unit

1. Remove the two screws [1].
[1]
5-145
2. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the feeding unit.
[1]
[2]
Removing the Platen Roller Unit

1. Turn over the feeder unit.
2. Remove the resin ring [1], and then remove the three gears [2] and the bearing [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4].
4. Remove the platen roller unit [5].
[5]
[2]
[4] [3] [1]
Removing the Read Roller 2

1. Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
5-146
2. Remove the resin ring [1], gear [2], and bearing [3].
[3] [2] [1]
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4], and then remove the read roller 2 [5].
Note: When installing the read roller 2, loosen the screws [6] and attach the belt.
[2] [5]
[1] [3] [4] [6]
Removing the Sensor Unit in the Feeder Unit

1. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the sensor unit [2].
[1]
[2]
Removing the Lower Registration Roller

1. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2].
2. Remove the resin ring [3], and then remove the gear [4].
[4] [3] [1] [2]
5-147
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and resin ring [2], and then remove the bearing [3].
4. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the spring [5] and metal plate [6].
[4]
[6]
[5] [3]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove the resin ring [1], and then remove the bearing [2] and lower registration roller [3].
[1] [2] [3]
Delivery Reversing Roller (upper) / Reverse Guide Unit

[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
5-148
[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]
5-149
[1] [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]

[4] [1]
[2]
[3]

[1] [2]
5-150
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]
5-151
[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
[1]
[2]
Removing the Upper Delivery Reversing Roller and the Reverse Guide Unit
1. Remove the resin ring [1] and bearing [2].
[1] [2]
5-152
2. Remove the resin ring [1], gear [2], and bearing [3], and then remove the upper delivery reversing roller [4]
from the Reverse Guide Unit [5].
[5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3]
Read Roller 1
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[3]
[1] [2]
5-153
[1]
[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]

[1] [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5-154
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]

[1] [2]

[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
5-155
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]

[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
5-156
[1]
[2]

2. Remove the two resin rings [1], four gears [2], and one bearing [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
[2]
[4] [3] [1]
4. Remove the two screws [1], two springs [2], the member [3], and the member [4] and then remove the
read roller 1 [5].
[1]
[3] [5]
[4]
[2] [2]
Note: When the read roller 2 is removed first, it works easily [the installation of the read roller [1].
5-157
Read Roller 2
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[3]
[1] [2]
5-158
[1]
[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]

[1] [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5-159
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]

[1] [2]

[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
5-160
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]

[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
5-161
[1]
[2]

[1]
[2]
[3] [2] [1]
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4], and then remove the read roller 2 [5].
[2] [5]
[1] [3] [4] [6]
5-162
Platen Roller
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[3]
[1] [2]
5-163
[1]
[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]

[1] [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5-164
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]

[1] [2]

[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
5-165
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]

[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
5-166
[1]
[2]
Removing the Platen Roller

2. Remove the resin ring [1], three gears [2], and one bearing [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
[2]
[4] [3] [1]
4. Remove the two screws [1], two springs [2], the member [3], and the member [4] and then remove the
platen roller [5].
[1]
[3] [5]
[4]
[2] [2]
Note: When the read roller 2 is removed first, it works easily [the installation of the platen roller].
5-167
Delivery Reversing Roller (lower)
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[3]
[1] [2]
5-168
[1]
[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]

[1] [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5-169
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]

[1] [2]

[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
5-170
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]

[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
5-171
[1]
[2]
Removing the Lower Delivery Reversing Roller

1. Remove the lower delivery reversing roller [1].
[1]
Feeding Unit
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
5-172
[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]
5-173
[4] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]

[4] [1]
[2]
[3]

[1] [2]
5-174
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]
5-175
[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
[1]
[2]
5-176
Document Tray
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[1]
[2]
[3]
5-177
[1] [2]
2. Remove the screw [1] at the back of the machine, and disconnect the ground cable [2].
3. Disconnect the tray harness connector (CN7) [3] from the ADF driver PCB.
4. Remove the harness [4] from the harness guide, and then detach the document tray [5].
[5] [4]
[3] [2] [1]
5-178
Electrical System
Inner Sensor of Feed Unit
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[3]
[1] [2]
5-179
[1]
[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]

[1] [3]
[4]
[3]
[2]
5-180
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]

[1] [2]
5-181
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[6]
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]
5-182
[3]
[1] [2]

[1]
[1]
[2]
Removing the Platen Roller Unit

2. Remove the resin ring [1], and then remove the three gears [2] and the bearing [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
5-183
4. Remove the platen roller unit [5].
[2]
[4] [3] [1]

[1]
[2]
[3] [2] [1]
3. Remove the resin ring [1], belt [2], gear [3], and bearing [4], and then
remove the read roller 2 [5].
[2] [5]
[1] [3] [4] [6]

5-184
Removing the Sensor in the Feeder Unit
1. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the sensor unit [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the sensor [1] from the sensor unit.
[1]
Document Width Volume

Removing the Relay PCB (Document Width Sensor PCB)
1. Remove the three screws [1] on the reverse side of the document tray using the stubby driver, and then
detach the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Disconnect the two connectors [1], and then remove the relay PCB (document width sensor PCB) [2].
[2]
[1]
5-185
Cover Open/Closed Sensor
[1]
[2]
[3]
Removing the Feeder Cover Open/Close Sensor

1. Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the feeder cover open/ close sensor [2].
[1] [2]
Document Set Sensor

[1]
[2]
[3]
5-186
Removing the Document Placement Sensor
1. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the document placement sensor [2].
[1] [2]
Document Length sensor

Removing the Document Length Sensor
1. Remove the three screws [1] on the reverse side of the document tray using the stubby driver, and then
detach the cover [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the document length sensor [1].
[1]
5-187
Pressurization Solenoid
[1]
[2]
[3]
Removing the Pressurization Solenoid (Roller Release Solenoid)

1. Disconnect the connector [1] from the ADF driver PCB.
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the pressurization solenoid (Roller Release Solenoid) [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
5-188
ADF Driver PCB
[1]
[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]
5-189
5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment
1. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette.
2. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF, RADF and FBS.
3. After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.
5.3.2 Printer registration mode

This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
2. Select “Vertical registration” or “Horizontal registration” and press [Enter].

3. To adjust the vertical registration, go to step 4.
To adjust the horizontal registration, select the paper source, and press [Enter].
4. Adjust the printer registration:

For example:
When you set “+12.3” for Vertical registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set
“–12.3”, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward.
When you set “+12.3” for Horizontal registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If you
set “”–12.3”, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between ”–12.7 mm” and
“+12.7 mm”.
5. Press [Enter] to save the settings.

6. To return to the standby, press [Reset].
Note: If you adjust the printer registration using this mode, the value entered by the machine
parameter will also be overwritten.
5-190
Printer registration (top)
Ladder patern
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard Setting Range
-12.7 to 12.7 (mm)
10 ± 1.9 (mm)
(0.1 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load A3 size paper to the cassette.
2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10)
3. Printout the test pattern “Ladder”. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter], select “Ladder” and
press [Enter].)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the “Printer registration mode,” press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
6. Refer to the last page and adjust the registration.
7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you
changed in step 2.
5-191
Printer registration (side)
Ladder pattern
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range
Machine parameter: 100, 120, 140, 160 –12.7 to 12.7 (mm)
10 ± 2.3 (mm)
110, 130, 150, 170 (0.6773 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the cassette.
3. Printout the test pattern “Ladder”. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter], select “Ladder” and
press [Enter].)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the “Printer registration mode,” press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
6. Refer to the last page and adjust the registration.
changed in step 2.
Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following
Machine parameters.
Cassette1 : Machine parameter 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170
Bypass Tray : Machine parameter 107, 117, 127, 137, 147, 157, 167, 177
Dupex printing : Machine parameter 108, 118, 128, 138, 148, 158, 168, 178
5-192
5.3.3 Registration adjustment
FBS registration (top)
Edge of the paper
A
Test Chart
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the
1st cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

–4.36 ～ 4.36 (mm)
10 ± 2.4 (mm) Machine parameter: 018
(0.0141 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the 1st cassette.
3. Place a Test Chart on the document glass.
4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications.
If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjust-
ment.
6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
7 Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 018 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.
changed in step 2.
5-193
FBS registration (side)
Test Chart
1.40
0.10
Edge of
the paper
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
1st cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

– 5.29 ～ 5.29 (mm)
10 ± 2.7 (mm) Machine parameter: 015
(0.2116 mm step)
ment.
7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 015 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
changed in step 2.
5-194
ADF/RADF registration (top)
Edge of the paper
1.40 Test Chart
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
1st cassette and ADF/RADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Model Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

MFX-2200 Machine parameter: –10.76 ～ 10.76 (mm)
20 ± 3.0 (mm)
MFX-2700 013 (0.0847 x 2 mm step)
Machine parameter:
MFX-2225 –7.86 ～ 7.86 (mm)
20 ± 3.0 (mm) 383 (Front page)
MFX-2725 (0.03093 x 2 mm step)
398 (Back page)
3. Place a Test Chart on the ADF or RADF.
ment.
7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 013, 383 or 384 to meet the specification.
changed in step 2.
5-195
ADF/RADF registration (bottom)
2000-15
Test Chart
No.200-15 A3

MFX-2200 Machine parameter: –10.76 ～ 10.76 (mm)
15 ± 3.0 (mm)
MFX-2720 014 (0.169 mm step)
Machine parameter:
MFX-2225 –7.86 ～ 7.86 (mm)
15 ± 3.0 (mm) 384 (Front page)
MFX-2725 (0.03093 x 2 mm step)
399 (Back page)
ment.
7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 014, 384 or 399 to meet the specification.
changed in step 2.
5-196
ADF/RADF registration (side)
Test Chart
1.40
0.10
Edge of
the paper
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30

MFX-2200 Machine parameter: – 26.88 ～ 26.88 (mm)
20 ± 3.3 (mm)
MFX-2700 010 (0.2116 mm step)
MFX-2225 Machine parameter: – 26.88 ～ 26.88 (mm)
20 ± 3.3 (mm)
MFX-2725 380 (0.2116 mm step)
ment.
7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 010 or 380 to meet the specification.
changed in step 2.
5-197
5.3.4 Zoom adjustment
FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)
1st cassette have been made.
Zoom ratio Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

330 ± 2.0 (mm) – 1.5 to 1.5 %
100 % Machine parameter: 435
(330 ± 0.6 %) (0.1 % step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the first cassette.
3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the standard range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 435 meets the specification.
If length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-198
FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
Zoom ratio Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

240 ± 1.4 (mm) – 1.5 to 1.5 %
100 % Machine parameter: 016
(240 ± 0.6 %) (0.1 % step)
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-199
ADF/RADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)
Mode Zoom ratio Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

MFX-2200 Machine parameter: – 6.3 to 6.3 %
100 % ± 1.0 %
MFX-2700 430 (0.1 % step)
100 % ± 1.0 %
MFX-2725 385 (0.1 % step)
6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 430 or 385 meets the specification.
5-200
ADF/RADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
Mode Zoom ratio Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

100 % ± 1.0 %
MFX-2700 011 (0.1 % step)
100 % ± 1.0 %
MFX-2725 381 (0.1 % step)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 011 or 381 to meet the specification.
5-201
5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment
Adjust the separation pressure using a screwdriver.
Rotate the screw by half-turn.

Rotate direction Separation pressure
Clockwise Up
Counterclockwise Down
5-202
5.3.6 ADF skew adjustment (MFX-2700 and MFX-2200)
Adjust the resist roller by changing the position of the holder resister.
1. Remove the Guide Outer A and take out the Holder Resister.
Holder Register
Guide Outer A

2. Reattach the Holder Resister with its direction up-side-down.
Direction B
Normal Adjustment Direction A

position position

3. Loosen the screw of the Holder Resister and adjust its position.
Tighten the screw after the adjustment.
When the Holder Resister is moved to direction A: The Copies will rotate to the clockwise direction.
When the Holder Resister is moved to direction B: The Copies will rotate to the counterclockwise
direction.
5-203
5.3.7 RADF Adjustment (MFX-2725 and MFX-2225)
Outline
This machine has the following adjustment items. Carry out each adjustment after replacing the
relevant parts.
No. Adjustment type Replaced parts Remarks
[1] Height adjustment Hinge
[2] Perpendicularity adjustment Hinge
[3] Magnification adjustment White roller
[4] Side registration adjustment - During installation only
[5] Leading edge registration adjustment - During installation only
[6] Reading position adjustment White roller
Note: Carry out the adjustment of above all after removing the RADF from the reader unit.
Height Adjustment
1. Pre-check
Check that the front and rear feet on the pickup side of the RADF are close contact with the document
glass when the RADF is closed.
Insert a sheet of paper between the RADF's document glass and the feet (two) and pull the paper in
the direction of the arrow to check that you feel slight resistance.
The recommended way of making this check is as follows:
First, insert a sheet of paper between the front foot [1] and the RADF's document glass, and then pull
it.
Next, insert a sheet of paper between the rear foot [2] and the RADF's document glass, and then pull
it.
Note:
- Use plain paper for this adjustment.
- Insert the paper [3] in such a manner that the sheet portion [4] of the document glass is covered.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
5-204
2. Adjustment Sequence
* When the front foot or rear foot is floating
1) Adjust the left hinge. (See 3.)
2) Adjust the right hinge. (See 4.)
3) Adjust the left hinge (see 3) or check the left hinge (see 1).
* When both feet are floating

2) Adjust the right hinge. (See 4.)
4) Adjust the right hinge (see 4) or check the right hinge (see 4).
3. Adjusting the Left Hinge Height

1) Adjust the left hinge height using the left height adjusting screw [1].
Note: Loosen the nut [2] before adjustment, and tighten it after adjustment.
* If the front foot is floating, turn the adjusting screw clockwise to lower the front foot until it touches
the glass.
* If the rear foot or both feet are floating, turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise to lower the rear
foot until it touches the glass.
4. Adjusting the Right Hinge Height

1) When closing the RADF, perform the following checks:
- The rib [1] on the bottom of the RADF must contact the copyboard glass holder (right) [2]. (Gap A
should not exist.)
- Check that the document pressure sheet [2] touches the document glass.
[2]
A
[1] [3]
5-205
2) If the height is inappropriate, adjust it using the right hinge height adjusting screw [1].
Note: Loosen the nut [2] before adjustment, and tighten it after adjustment.
* Turning the adjusting screw clockwise reduces clearance A.

* Turning the adjusting screw counterclockwise increases clearance A.
3) Perform step 1 of the left hinge height adjustment procedure. If the height is inappropriate, adjust it
again.
Perpendicularity Adjustment
1) Place the test chart on the RADF and take a copy of it.
Chart
Test chart
feed
direction
A�
Feed Copy
direction
B�
2) Check the squareness of the image on the copy. Measure the dimensions A and B at the leading
edge of the test chart and the dimensions A' and B' at the leading edge of the copy. If it not (A-B) =
(A'-B'), perform steps 3 and later.
5-206
3) Loosen the right hinge clamping screw [1], and slide the hinge back and forth with reference to the
graduation marks.
4) Tighten the hinge clamping screw loosened in step 3).
5-207
5.3.8 Drum ATDC adjustment
Important : When the Main PCB is replaced, the ATDC value and drum life should be reentered.
Note: Before replacing the Main PCB, be sure to see the Life Monitor and ATDC adjustment to write
down the machine condition. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> and press [Enter]) For more infor-
mation about Life Monitor see section 3, “3.11.1 Life Monitor” and “3.11.9 ATDC adjustment”.
1. When the machine is restarted, the following message will be displayed.
2. Press either [Manual] or [Auto].

3. If you have pressed [Auto], wait about six minutes until the machine adjust the ATDC value itself.
When the adjustment is over, go to step 10.
4. If you have pressed [Manual] the following screen will be displayed:
5. Select “ASTD” and press [Enter].

6. Enter the ASTD value, and press [Enter].
7. Select “DeltaVCONT” and press [Enter].

8. Enter the DeltaVCONT value, and press [Enter].
9. Select “Drum Life Time” and press [Enter].

10. Enter the drum life time, and press [Enter].
11. Press [Close] to exit the mode.

12. Enter the life monitor value using the Life Monitor Maintenance mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>,
<0> and enter the values.) For more information about Life Monitor Maintenance mode, see section
3.
5-208
6 Options
CAUTION: This installation should be done by a qualified service technician.
6.1 Paper cassette
The way to attach the second cassette to the MFP, and the third or fourth cassette to the seccond or
the third is almost the same.
Here the procedures are explained with the second cassette attaching to the MFP.
Note: Do not lift the machine by using anything other than the handles. Doing so may damage the
unit.
6.1.1 Packaging contents:

1. Optional paper cassette.................................... 1
2. Fixing plates..................................................... 4
3. Screws . ........................................................... 8
4. Paper size label ............................................... 1
6.1.2 Installation
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
2. Set the machine on top of the optional cassette.
(To attach the third cassette or fourth cassette to the second or third cassette, set it on the counter-
part.)
Option cassette
6-1
3. Remove four screws and the Cover Rear of the optional cassette.
4. Remove one screw and the Plate Printer C from the MFP back side.
5. Slide the harness through the machine and attach the connector of the PCB Main (P23).
Plate printer C
Harness
Cover rear
*Attaching the third cassette or fourth cassette to the second or third cassette.
Option cassette (2nd)
Cover rear (2nd)
Harness
Cover rear (3rd) Option cassette (3rd)
6. Reattach the covers removed in steps 3 and 4.

Note: Make sure the harness is not wedged into the machine.
7. Open the first cassette and attach the fixing plates on both ends of the machine using each two
screws.
8. Attach the fixing plates on the backside of the machine on both ends using each two screws.
Fixture
6-2
9. Open the paper cassette and load the paper into the cassette.
10. Adjust the rear and side paper guides to the paper.
11. Turn the paper size dial to indicate the paper size.
12. Close the cassette.

13. Plug the power cord and turn on the machine.
14. If you have set the dial to “Others” in step 11, press <Menu>, <3>, [Enter] and select “Other paper”
and press [Enter]. Select the cassette you are going to set the paper size, press [Enter], select the
paper size and press [Enter].
15. Apply the correct paper size label and the cassette number label to the cassette.
The paper size labels are supplied with the optional cassette. The cassette number label is sup-
plied with the MFP.
6-3
6.2 Conformation Stamp
About 30,000 times stamp is available with blue ink stamp, 10,000 times with pink ink stamp.
Note: The concormation stamp for MFX-2725 and MFX-2225 are standard equipment.

1. Stamp solenoid................................................. 1
2. Stamp............................................................... 1
3. Screw................................................................ 1
6.2.2 Installation
1. Open the cover platen.
2. Peel off the left side of the Sheet document press.
Sheet document press
3. Turn the Bracket stamp out and attach the stamp solenoid using one screw.
4. Connect the harness to the connector.
Solenoid
Bracket stamp
5. Remove the stamp cap from the stamp and insert it to the solenoid.
6. Turn the stamp unit back to the platen cover.

7. Reattach the Sheet document press.
8. Close the platen cover.
6-4
6.3 Page Counter
The mechanical counter shows the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Note: This device counts up to 999,999 pages. If more pages are printed, the counter resets to zero
and begins counting the new pages from that point.

1. Mechanical counter ......................................... 1
6.3.2 Installation
2. Open the front cover.
3. Use nippers and open the cover.
4. Pull out the harness and connect it to the counter.
5. Tuck the harness into toe machine and set the counter to the opening.
6. Close the front cover.
Counter
The counter will now count the number of pages printed.
6-5
6.4 PCL printer controller
1. PCL printer board............................................. 1
2. PCB Joint.......................................................... 1
3. PCB spacer...................................................... 1
4. Stud spacers..................................................... 2
5. Spacers............................................................ 4
6. Screw .............................................................. 5
7. Soft key laber .................................................. 1
8��
. Setup Disk........................................................ 1 ��
(��
C��
ontains PCL and TWAIN drivers��
��
and manuals)
9. Installation Instruction....................................... 1
6.4.2 Installation
1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord.
2. If the machine has an ADF or RADF, remove one screw and plate printer B. Otherwise go to step 4.
3. Disconnect one connector for ADF model, two connectors for RADF model.
4. Remove eleven screws and the plate printer A.
5. Attach one PCB spacer.
6. Attach two stud spacers.
7. Attach the PCL printer board and screw it using three screws.
PCB spacer
Stud spacer
PCL PCB
6-6
8. Attach two spacers to the Main PCB.
9. Attach two spacers to the PCL printer board.
10. Attach the Joint PCB to the PCL printer board and Main PCB, and screw it using two screws.
Spacer
PCB joint
11. Reattach the parts that was removed in steps 2 to 4.

*Use the enclosed CD to install the print drivers.
6-7
6.5 OfficeBridge Expansion kit
1. OfficeBridge board............................................ 1
2. Spacers............................................................ 2
3. Screws.............................................................. 4
4. Soft key label ................................................... 1
5. Caution label for power off .............................. 1
6. Setup Guide .................................................... 1
7. Setup Disk........................................................ 1 (��
C��
ontains OfficeBridge programs��
��
and manuals)
8. Installation Instruction . .................................... 1
Note: To connect the machine to the network a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable (Category 5) is
required.
6.5.2 Installation
5. Remove two screws and Cover side L Sub.
6. Use nippers to punch out the cover for network connection.
7. Reattach the Cover side L Sub.
Cover side L sub
8. Attach two spacers to the PCB Main.

9. Attach the OfficeBridge board and screw it using four screws.
6-8
PCB main
Network Interface Board
Spacer

11. Attach the caution label at the power switch.
*Refer to the setup guide how to set up OfficeBridge.
6-9
6.6 Network Interface Board
1. Network Interface Board . ................................ 1
2. Spacers............................................................ 2
3. Screws.............................................................. 4
4. Installation Instruction....................................... 1
Note: To connect the machine to the network a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable (Category 5)
is required
6.6.2 Installation
5. Remove two screws and Cover side L Sub.
6. Use nippers to punch out the cover for network connection.
7. Reattach the Cover side L Sub.
Cover side L sub
8. Attach two spacers to the PCB Main.

9. Attach the Network Interface Board and screw it using four screws.
PCB main
Network Interface Board
Spacer

11. Connect one end of an LAN cable to the Network Interface Board.
6-10
12. Plug the other end of the LAN cable into the 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet hub.
13. Plug the power cord and turn the power on. Go ahead to the “Network settings”.
Network Settings
To use the machine on a network, set the IP address and Subnet mask on the machine.
There are two ways of settings according to the network environment:
• Automatic setup; If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is installed on
your network, the IP address and Subnet mask is assign automatically to
the machine when the machine is turned.
Important: O
nce the DHCP server has assigned the IP address to your
machine, that IP address MUST be reserved within the specific
DHCP scope. Failure to do so could result in failed operation
when the IP address lease expires.
• Manual setup ; If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is NOT installed
on your network, see the steps below and set up the IP address and Sub-
net mask.
1. Press <Menu>, <7>, <2>, <3> and [Enter].
2. If the password is registred, enter the password and press [Enter].
Otherwise, go to step 3.

3. Select “IP Address” and press [Enter].

4. Select “DHCP Setting” and press [Enter].

5. Select “Off” and press [Enter].
6. Select “IP address” and press [Enter].
7. Enter the IP address using the numeric keys and press [Enter].
8. Select “Subnet mask” and press [Enter].
9. Enter the Subnet mask using the numeric keys and press [Enter].
6-11
6.7 Scanner heater
1. Scanner heater ................................................ 1
2. Sheet heater..................................................... 1
3. Screw................................................................ 1
4. Installation Instruction . .................................... 1
6.7.2 Installation
5. Remove the Cover platen.
6. Remove the Cover left top and Cover right top.
7. Remove the Cover size H and Cover back top.
Size H cover
Back top cover

Right top cover
Left top cover
8. Remove the Pane.

9. Attach the scanner heater using one screw.
10. Remove one screw from the Supporter FPC and thread the harness of the heater under the sup-
porter.
11. Thread the harness through the opening in the machine frame.
Tape
Heater
Supporter FPC
6-12
12. Connect the harness to the Scanner PCB (P149).
P149
PCB Scanner
13. Reattach the screw that was removed in step 8.

14. Reattach all the covers and the pane that were removed.
15. Put the Sheet document on the bottom side of the FBS.
Heater sheet
6-13
6.8 Cassette heater
1. Heater . ............................................................ 1
2. AC Inlet . .......................................................... 1
3. AC power . ....................................................... 1
4. Chassis cover .................................................. 1
5. Screw (A) . ....................................................... 7
6. Screw (B) . ....................................................... 1
7. Clamps ............................................................ 3
8. Rating Label .................................................... 1
9. Caution Label .................................................. 1
10. Installation Instruction . .................................. 1
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6.8.2 Installation
2. Open the rear cover of the second, third or fourth cassette.
6-14
3. Open the left cover of the second, third or fourth cassette.
4. Attach the chassis cover to the cassette-chassis using two screws (screw A).
A A
5. Insert the heater from the rear side of the cassette. Make sure that the heater mounts on the cas-
sette-chassis on the front side of the casette.
6. Attach the heater using one screw (screw A) from the front side of the cassette.
7. Attach the heater using two screws (screw A) from the rear side of the cassette.
8. Attach the AC inlet to the cassette-chassis using two screws (screw A).
6-15
9. Attach the clamps to the cassette-chassis.
10. Attach the ground wire to the cassette-chassis using one screw (screw B).
11. Connect the connectors.

12. Fix the cable to the clamps.
13. Use nippers to punch out the cover for AC inlet and reattach the cover.
14. Reattach the rear cover.

15. Attach the Rating label to the rear cover.
16. Plug the non-pronged end of the supplied power cord into the power socket.
6-16
17. Attach the caution label to the front of the cassette.
18. Plug the pronged end into a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6-17
MFX-2725 / MFX-2225 (RADF Model) Cable Diagram
PRINTER UNIT PCB MAIN DB2-08010-50 2nd CASSETTE 3rd CASSETTE 4th CASSETTE
Fuser (A3) ASSY FUSER TH -CBL DB2-08730-40A PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50
CBL-ASSY FUSER TH DB2-08730-50A P23 A110-A-1 15 320mm BU15P-TR-P-H(LF)(SN) A110-B-2 15 200mm A110-B-2 15 200mm A110-B-2 15 200mm
THERMISTER(A3) Drawer Drawer (1-n connection) B30B-PHDSS CBL-ASSY CAS Z07-24145-00 (1-n connection) ASSY EXCAS1-CBL B15B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS1-CBL B15B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS1-CBL B15B-PH-K
Z90-55856-00 A170 130mm connector 1B connector 1A A010 2 640mm ?? DB2-08290-50B DB2-08570-40B DB2-08570-40B DB2-08570-40B
HF-DB2 CZHR-07V-S CBL-ASSY THMS B5B-SH-K 0
BU02P-TR-P-H CZHR-07V-S (A3) (A3) DB2-08220-50A (1-n connection) 320mm BU14P-TR-P-H(LF)(SN) A110-A-2 14 180mm A110-A-2 14 180mm A110-A-2 14 180mm
14 Z07-46281-00 (1-n connection) ASSY EXCAS2-CBL B14B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS2-CBL B14B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS2-CBL B14B-PH-K
?A1-03085-00(Z07-74551-00) DB2-08740-40BASSY FUSER1-CBL (1-n connection) (1-n connection) DB2-08560-40A DB2-08560-40A DB2-08560-40A
Thermostat 36FXE04_560907 A180-1 45mm 0
Thermal Fuse Z90-48827-00 CBL-ASSY FUSER 1 AWG#18 FBS UNIT
E4A50167C DB2-08740-50B PCB NCU DAA DB5-0808X-50 PCB SCANNER RADF LAMP INVERTER VHR-4N DA10847040C B2P4VH DB2-08950-40A
(Fuse side) LINE P90 A030 28 350mm P9 P14A A121 26 120mm P140A P147 B010 3 700mm CN1 CN2 D010 2 (105mm) FPC 2 (Direct attachec to LAMP) LAMP
A230 105mm B28B-PHDSS DCB-52836-50A B28B-PHDSS BM50B-SRDS CBL-ASSY SCANNER1 BM50B-SRDS B3B-EH-K CBL-ASSY INVERTER S3B-EH-K S2P4-VH (DA10847050C) Z904758200 ASSY FFC-CBL
TEL (CBL-ASSY NCU) DB2-08200-50B DB2-28020-50 DB2-08340-40A Z904758300 (CBL-ASSY LAMP) VHR-4M
(DB2-08230-50A) DA1??
A180-2 SRWM-61GG-S0.6 SRWF-61GG-M0.6 EXTEL P14B A123 2 120mm P140B RADF UNIT
CBL-ASSY FUSER 4 B2PVH CBL-ASSY SCANNER2 B2PVH PBA-ADF DB26807050A Feed Motor M1
HEATER LAMP(A3) DB2-08870-50A 7R-RIZ-K4GG-SQ3FL(LF) 7P-RIZ-K2GG-S3RL(LF) DB2-08210-50B CN4 6 (Attached to Motor) MOT-17PM-J344-P1VS
(Front Heater Lamp side) (Receptacle) (Plug) DB26012160
PCB PSU DB2 DB2-089XX-50 660mm PCB CCD

DB2-08750-50A CBL-ASSY FUSER2 (HEATERLAMP <-> Thermal Fuse) 70mm LPS DA1:360mm P141 B030 20 FFC P180 DB50814050A Feed Motor M2
DB2-08760-50A CBL-ASSY FUSER3 (HEATERLAMP <-> Tehrmostat) 100mm A160 2 620mm CN1 CN2 A050 12 500mm P12 +FBS:260mm 20FMN-BTK CN11 MOT-17PM-J344-P1VS
ASSY PSU-HEATER-CBL B2P3VH B16B-XH-A CBL-ASSY LVPS B16B-XH-A +rear:230mm TFL-100K-20-0660? ZA1-03084-30 DB26012160
*DB2-100 ZA1-02909-A0 DB2-08280-40C DB2-08240-40A 850
*DB2-220 ZA1-02908-70 EXT MEMORY
A280 ASSY AC IL-CBL Direct from motor P1420 FBS MOTOR (Bi HB) Divider Solenoid
:360mm
DB2-08790-40C 890mm +FBS:30mm P142 B040 180mm 6 (Attached ZA10233100 CN5 2 (Attached to Solenoid) SOL-TDS-10SL-174
+rear:250mm B6B-EH-K DCB-20618-50A to Motor) (385mm) DB26804050A
640 P1421
(CBL-ASSY AC-SW2) PCB CONN MOT(DB2-08180-50A)
DFG-01S4G-514 (DB2-08780-50A) HOME SENSOR COVER PI10
P20 DA1:600mm P143 B050 3 740mm SG-2482A ASM-SENS2 3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
VLP-02V VLR-02V +FBS:30mm B3B-PH-K DCB-70374-50A S3B-PH-K Z903777750 CN9 DB26806050A DB26809050A
50mm +rear:100mm (CBL-ASSY HOME)
A270 210mm P19 730 (DB2-08350-50A)
RED APS EMPTY PI11
(CBL-ASSY AC-SW1) ASSY AC-SW1-CBL DA1:140mm P144 B060 3 230mm SG-2482A 3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
(DB2-08770-50A) DB2-08770-40C +FBS:30mm B6B-PH-K CBL-ASSY APS S3B-PH-K Z903777750 DB26809050A
+rear:100mm 6-Blue DB2-08360-50B
270
BROWN BIS EXIT PI6
3 230mm SG-2482A ASM-SENS1 3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
PCB LPH DB2-08070-50 S3B-PH-K Z903777750 CN8 DB26816050A DB26809050A
PCB THERMISTOR P800
D71-28080-50B 2 140mm P6 P1 A142 28 500mm P13
CBL-ASSY TEMP B2B-PH-K B28B-PHDSS DB2-08250-40A B28B-PHDSS READ PI7
CN 53254-0272 2P RED DB2-08980-50A ASSY LPH-CBL 3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
SBS PS181FL17 DB26809050A
LED HEAD (KYOCERA) (1-n connection) 250mm P21 DA1:230mm P146 B080-1 3 520mm Z076499900
Z90-55180-00 A091 40 FFC P4 +FBS:270mm B6B-PH-K CBL-ASSY SBS
FH12-40S-0.5SV +rear:50mm DB2-08370-40A Except USA Except USA REG PI8
[HIROSE] 550 3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
(HRS No.586-0566-900) A091 40 FFC P5 51090-0500 MBS EY3A-3051 DB26809050A
P145 3 600mm Z903593650
TFL-100K-22-0250(W5) B5B-PH-K CBL-ASSY SBS-USA
Z90-55073-00 DB2-08380-50B USA Only 53325-0510 USA Only CN201 STMPER
CN6 ASM-STAMP 2 SL2
PCB PCL DA5-08010-50 PCB CONN PCL P149 B090 2 HEATER DB26803050A
DA50801050H P3 DB2-08160-50 P6 53258-0210 (Heater attached) Z903755550
DHB-RD50-S13NN-4.9 DHB-PB50-S13NN
Black dot in tASSY ?????? PBA-TYUKEI LAST PI3
CBL-C DB26813050A 3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
PCB LIME DA4-08013-50 P151 28 CN1 CN31 DB26809050A
DA40801050G P2 P7 B28B-PHDSS 700mm
ASM-IF-LONG CN2 SIZE_L1 PI4
DB26805050A 3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
DB26809050A
FLASH WRITER JIG PCB DPRAM I/F D000819050 P150 4 CN10
A150 16 P18 B4B-XH-A
DCB5161050A 100mm B16B-PHDSS SIZE_L2 PI5
CN7 ASM-L-SIZE 7 CN31 3 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
DB5-0813X-50
PCB NCU DAA 2ND PCB EXT LINE2 DA5-18020-50 Motor
DB26810050A DB26809050A
LINE P90 A100 26 500mm(A3) P8
B28B-PHDSS DCB-52850-50A XH3A-6841-4 XH3B-6841-4
TEL (CBL-ASSY NCU DB2) SIZE_W1 PI2
(DB2-08990-40A) TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
EXTEL DB26809050A
PCB PANEL B DB2-08060-50 PCB PANEL A DB2-08050-50 SIZE_W2 PI1

A210 32 1060mm P11 TLP1243(C8,CANO2)
ASSY PANEL-CBL B32B-PHDSS DB26809050A
DB2-08260-40B
LCD A290
Z90-55074-00
A300 200mm
DFG-S3S3B-520
(FBS PNL-FLM)
PCB VOICE DB2-0809X-50

A240 16 180mm P22
DCB-51618-50A B16B-PHDSS
(CBL-ASSY VOICE)
(DB2-08270-50A)
PCB PRT DB2-08040-50

PCB MAIN DB2-08010-50
P15A A131 40 140mm P150A PRT MOTOR-1[RX MOTOR] (DC)

BM40B-SRDS CBL-ASSY PRT1 BM40B-SRDS P159 E060 6 620mm 50M3203011
DB2-08300-50B B6B-EH-A DCB-20662-54A B6B-EH-A Z904868100
[f-a-e] (CBL-ASSY PRT MOTOR1) (A3)
P15B A133 20 150mm P150B 6-Blue (DB2-08470-50A)
B20B-PHDSS CBL-ASSY PRT2 B20B-PHDSS PRT MOTOR-2[RX MOTOR] (DC)
DB2-08310-50C P187 E340 6 240mm 50M3203011
B6B-EH-A DCB-20624-50A B6B-EH-A Z904868100
Paper detection senfor (1st CAS) (1-n connection) (1-n connection) [f-a-e] (CBL-ASSY PRT MOTOR2) (A3)
SG-2482A E010-A-2 3 90mm BU06P-TR-P-H E010-A-1 6 840mm P153 (DB2-08480-50A)
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K CBL-ASSY PES2 Z07-46288-00 CBL-ASSY PES1 B11B-PH-K SLR-02VF Printer cover sensor (A3)
/PES DB2-08610-50A DB2-08600-40A 11-Blue P152 E080 2 990mm 2 (Microswitch)
[I-H] B3B-EH-K CBL-ASSY INTERLOCK
Lift up location sensor(1st) (A3) DB2-08490-50C SLP-02V DB2-08880-40B
SG-2482A 3 140mm E400 P189
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K PCB DUPLEX DB2-08170-50 PHR-6 DUP MOTOR(A3)
P175 E260 10 280mm 6 ??? KBL42LLH286A
B10B-PH-K ASSY DUP MOTOR-CBL ZA102456A0
Paper size / Open sensor (1st)(A3)) 51090-0500[MOLEX] DB2-08670-40A (260mm) TOTAL 400mm
SW-186 E020-A 5 1010mm P154
Z076499500 53325-0510 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S DUP Clutch (A3)
CASOP,PSIZE(4bit Type) P178 E450 2 210mm 2 (2.5K)
DB20881050A DA10857050C Z905606900
CBL-ASSY DUP CL CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
Paper supply sensor (A3)
SG-2482A E030-A 3 520mm P155 Temperature and humidity (A3)
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K ASSY PSS-CBL B17B-CZHK-B-1 P188 E410 4 350mm CHS-CSC-18*
PSS DB2-08620-40A [I-H] B4B-PH-K CBL-ASSY TEMP HUMD 175489-4 Z90-55854-00
4-Blue DB2-08690-50B [AMP] CBL-ASSY TRANSFER
[e] DB2-08850-50A
Developer (A3) Developing 1 580mm HV unit ATDC Sensor(A3) 51021-0200 Drawer Drawer (1-n connection) PSU HV(A3) Z90-55855-00 E??? 285mm HV TRANSFER Transfer roller Transfer roller
Roller CBL-ASSY DEVHV Z90-55860-00 E370 4 130mm Connector Connector E240 14 430mm P173 P171 E360 11 220mm EUKMBZ984H DB2-08890-50B
DB2-08860-50A TS0524ANK(TDK)53047-0410 CBL-ASSY DEV 2B 2A B11B-PH-K DCB-71122-50A B11B-PH-K E??? 195mm HV CHAGER CBL-ASSY TRANSFER2
DB2-08630-50B CZHR-14V-S 11-Natural (CBL-ASSY HVPS) CBL-ASSY CHAGER
(1-n connection) (DB2-08460-50A) DB2-08840-50A EXIT roller Chassis
DRUM UNIT(A3) FUSE
PCB ERS DB2-08140-50
E380 3 500mm
PCB DEV DB2-08130-50
10 60mm
(A3) (A3)
P172 P186 E330 3 310mm
Toenr catridge ON(A3)
SG-2482A
DFG-S3S3B-509
Z07-65650-00 B3B-PH-K CBL-ASSY ERS B3B-PH-K B10B-PH-K B4B-EH-A B6B-PH-K CBL-ASSY TONER EMPTY S3B-PH-K Z903777750
0251.062MXL DB2-08640-50A PHR-10 CZHR-14V-S 6-Blue DB2-08700-40A CART_ON (A3) Bypass tray flapper Chassia
14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL 14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF) DFG-S3S3B-518
Z07-65106-00 Z07-65107-00 173977-3[AMP] TONER EMPTY(A3)
Paper feed clutch (B4) CZHR-03V-S 51005-0200 51006-0200 P185 3 340mm TSP15D10C-01(TDK)
(2.5K) 1st CAS 2 E160 2 790mm P156 175489-3 Z90-55859-00 Discharger brush Chassia
Z905606900 DA10857050C ASSY LU MOTOR-CBL B6B-PH-K [AMP] DFG-S3S3B-530
FCL_1 CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 DB2-08650-40A 6-Natural
[f-G-A-e] 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S SCREW Clutch (A3)
Paper register clutch (A3) CZHR-03V-S 51005-0200 51006-0200 P177 E190 2 350mm 2 (2.5K) Dup. Feed roller Chassia
(5.0K) 2 50mm 730mm P157 B4B-PH-K ASSY TONER MOTOR-CBL DA10857050C Z905606900 DFG-S3S3B-520
Z905623000 DA10857050C 4-Natural DB2-08710-40A CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
173977-2[AMP] Toner transfer MOTOR(A3)
Lift up MOTOR(1st) (A3) 173977-2[AMP] P176 2 280mm DU2432-1
DU2421-1 2 820mm P190 ZA10298900 292250-2
ZA102988A0 [AMP]
175489-2[AMP]
(1-n connection)
Paper feed solenoid (A3) BU02P-TR-P-H
SLND TDS-F08G-35 * 2 100mm E050 2 650mm P158 a
Z90-45101-00 BYPASS B13B-PH-K
FCLCHH PHNR02 PHNR02 A
(nonpoler) ASSY BP SIZE-CBL [F-E-e] PDS G
Paper detect sensor (B4) DB2-08660-40E P165 E200 3 710mm SG-2482A
SG-2482A 3 1050mm P160 B11B-PH-K ASSY JCOP-CBL S3B-PH-K Z903777750
I
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K 11-Red DB2-08720-40A
e d
/BP_PES J
(1-n connection) DUP Switch back senser (A3) D
PCB BPSIZE DB2-08150-50 BU05P-TR-P-H P181 3 420mm SG-2482A f
BYPASS PAPER SIZE (A3) E430 640mm 5 720mm P169 S3B-PH-K Z903777750 H b
S-1110A B5B-PH-K DCB-D0564-50A
(CBL-ASSY BPSIZE) B C
(DB2-08800-50A) (1-n connection) Jam access cover sensor (1st)
DUP JAM SENSOR(A3) BU03P-TR-P-H P184 P166 3 330mm SG-2482A
SG-2482A E420 420mm 3 720mm S3B-PH-K Z903777750
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K DCB-D0342-50A /JCOP
(CBL-ASSY DUP JAM)
(1-n connection) F E
(DB2-08680-50A) BU02P-TR-P-H SPEAKER
Mechanical counter (A3) PHNR02C(Reverse type) BU02P-TR-P-H P151 2 890mm CP057044
CNTR MZ-671 DC24V_D18 2 265mm 1 1 E210 2 920mm P179 D880862040B ZA10008870 c
Z903522350 2 2 PHNR03 B5B-PH-K (1-n connection) ASSY SPEAKER
ASSY FAN-CBL [J-I]
DB2-08500-40C
Process FAN (80mm dice) PHNR03 BU03P-TR-P-H
D08K-24TG_14B(AX) 1 1 3 520mm P161
ZA1-02364-40 (70mm) 3 3
PHNR03
(1-n connection)
PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50
P1
B15B-PH-K
P2 HEATER
B14B-PH-K PAPER SIZE SENSOR (OPTIONCASSETTE) DB2-08970-40A
P5 F040-A 5 830mm SW-186 ASSY CAS HEATER-CBL
Jam access cover sensor(2,3,4) (1-n connection) (1-n connection) B5B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS SIZE-CBL Z076499500
SG-2482A F020-A 3 410mm BU12P-TR-P-H F030-A 12 660mm P4 DB2-08510-40A CASOP , PSIZ (4bit Type)
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K CBL-ASSY EXCAS JCOP1 Z07-46283-00 CBL-ASSY EXCAS JCOP2 B12B-PH-K
DB2-08530-50B DB2-08540-50B 280mm CAS MOTOR
P6 F060 6 120mm PM55L-048-MRE6 24V
Paper Jam sensor B6B-PH-K PHR6 ZA10298770
SG-2482A 3 440mm
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K
P3 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S FCL_2,3,4 Paper feed clutch

List up location sensor B4B-PH-K F010-A 2 180mm 2 (2.5K) 2,3,4 CAS
SG-2482A 3 140mm CBL-ASSY EXCAS CL DA10857050C Z905606900
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K DB2-08520-50B CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
173977-2[AMP]
List up MOTOR
Paper detection sensor (2,3 CAS) 2 170mm DU2421-1
SG-2482A 3 90mm 175489-2[AMP]
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K ZA102988A0
PES
MFX-2700/MFX-2200 (ADF Model) Cable Diagram
PRINTER UNIT PCB MAIN DB2-08010-50 2nd CASSETTE 3rd CASSETTE 4th CASSETTE
Fuser (A3) ASSY FUSER TH -CBL DB2-08730-40A PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50 PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50
CBL-ASSY FUSER TH DB2-08730-50A P23 A110-A-1 15 320mm BU15P-TR-P-H(LF)(SN) A110-B-2 15 200mm A110-B-2 15 200mm A110-B-2 15 200mm
THERMISTER(A3) Drawer Drawer (1-n connection) B30B-PHDSS CBL-ASSY CAS Z07-24145-00 (1-n connecton) ASSY EXCAS1-CBL B15B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS1-CBL B15B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS1-CBL B15B-PH-K
Z90-55856-00 A170 130mm Connector Connector A010 2 640mm DB2-08290-50B DB2-08570-40B DB2-08570-40B DB2-08570-40B
HF-DB2 1B 1A CZHR-07V-S CBL-ASSY THMS B5B-SH-K 0
BU02P-TR-P-H CZHR-07V-S (A3) (A3) DB2-08220-50A (1-n connection) 320mm BU14P-TR-P-H(LF)(SN) A110-A-2 14 180mm A110-A-2 14 180mm A110-A-2 14 180mm
14 Z07-46281-00 (1-n connection) ASSY EXCAS2-CBL B14B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS2-CBL B14B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS2-CBL B14B-PH-K
DB2-08740-40B ASSY FUSER1-CBL (1-n connection) (1-n conneciton) DB2-08560-40A DB2-08560-40A DB2-08560-40A
Thermostat 36FXE04_560907 A180-1 45mm 0
THERMAL FUSE Z90-48827-00 CBL-ASSY FUSER 1 AWG#18 FBS UNIT
E4A50167C DB2-08740-50B PCB NCU DAA DB5-0808X-50 PCB SCANNER DB2-08020-50 LAMP INVERTER VHR-4N DA10847040C B2P4VH DB2-08950-40A
(Fuse Side) LINE P90 A030 28 350mm P9 P14A A121 26 120mm P140A P147 B010 3 700mm CN1 CN2 D010 2 (105mm) FPC 2 LAMP
A230 105mm B28B-PHDSS DCB-52836-50A B28B-PHDSS BM50B-SRDS CBL-ASSY SCANNER1 BM50B-SRDS B3B-EH-K CBL-ASSY INVERTER S3B-EH-K S2P4-VH (DA10847050C) (Direct attachec to LAMP) Z904758200 ASSY FFC-CBL
TEL (CBL-ASSY NCU) DB2-08200-50B DB2-08340-40A Z904758300 (CBL-ASSY LAMP) VHR-4M
(DB2-08230-50A) DA1:340mm
A180-2 SRWM-61GG-S0.6 SRWF-61GG-M0.6 EXTEL P14B A123 2 120mm P140B +FBS:280mm Black dot in tASSY ADF UNIT
CBL-ASSY FUSER 4 B2PVH CBL-ASSY SCANNER2 B2PVH +rear:180mm DFG-S3S3B-590 PCB ADF DB5-08030-50 (Attach to Motor) ADF MOTOR (Bi HB)
HEATER LAMP(A3) DB2-08870-50A 7R-RIZ-K4GG-SQ3FL(LF) 7P-RIZ-K2GG-S3RL(LF) DB2-08210-50B P148 B020 800 34 600mm P1480 P1481 C010 6 300mm ZA10293120
(Front Heater Lamp Side) (Receptacle) (Plug) B34B-PHDSS ASSY ADF-CBL DA1:540mm B34B-PHDSS B6B-EH-K
DB2-08320-40C +100mm
DB2-089XX-50 (1-n connection) 660mm PCB CCD 640
DB2-08750-50A CBL-ASSY FUSER2 (HEATERLAMP <-> THERMAL FUSE) 70mm LPS DA1:360mm P141 B030 20 FFC P180 DB50814050A 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S DCLCSE Separator clutch
DB2-08760-50A CBL-ASSY FUSER3 (HEATERLAMP <-> Tehrmostat) 100mm A160 2 620mm CN1 CN2 A050 12 500mm P12 +FBS:260mm 20FMN-BTK P1482 C020 2 100mm 2 (2.5K)
ASSY PSU-HEATER-CBL B2P3VH B16B-XH-A CBL-ASSY LVPS B16B-XH-A +rear:230mm TFL-100K-20-0660 ZA1-03084-30 B7B-PH-K CBL-ASSY ADF CL DA10857050C Z905606900
*DB2-100 ZA1-02909-A0 DB2-08280-40C DB2-08240-40A 850 DB5-08400-50B CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
*DB2-220 ZA1-02908-70 EXT MEMORY
A280 ASSY AC IL-CBL Direct from P1420 FBS MOTOR (Bi HB) 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S DCLCRE Register clutch
DB2-08790-40C 890mm moter:360mm P142 B040 180mm 6 (Attached to ZA10233100 2 240mm 2 (5.0K)
+FBS:30mm B6B-EH-K DCB-20618-50A Moter) (385mm) DA10857050C Z905485900
+rear:250mm
640 P1421 CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
(CBL-ASSY AC-SW2) PCB CONN MOT(DB2-08180-50A)
DFG-01S4G-514 (DB2-08780-50A) HOME SENSOR TXIL
P20 DA1:600mm P143 B050 3 740mm SG-2482A 3 370mm SG-2482A
VLP-02V VLR-02V +FBS:30mm B3B-PH-K DCB-70374-50A S3B-PH-K Z903777750 S3B-PH-K Z903777750
50mm +rear:100mm (CBL-ASSY HOME)
A270 210mm P19 730 (DB2-08350-50A)
RED APS RED DW1(DB4)
(CBL-ASSY AC-SW1) ASSY AC-SW1-CBL DA1:140mm P144 B060 3 230mm SG-2482A P1483 C030 3 430mm SG-2482A
(DB2-08770-50A) DB2-08770-40C +FBS:30mm B6B-PH-K CBL-ASSY APS S3B-PH-K Z903777750 B12B-PH-K CBL-ASSY ADF SIZE S3B-PH-K Z903777750
+rear:100mm 6-Blue DB2-08360-50B DB5-08410-50B
270
BROWN BIS BROWN DW2(DA3)
3 230mm SG-2482A 3 360mm SG-2482A
PCB LPH DB2-08070-50 S3B-PH-K Z903777750 CBL-ASSY ADF SIZE-USA S3B-PH-K Z903777750
PCB THERMISTOR P800 DB5-08420-50B
D71-28080-50B 2 140mm P6 P1 A142 28 500mm P13 USA Only
CBL-ASSY TEMP B2B-PH-K B28B-PHDSS DB2-08250-40A B28B-PHDSS 179228-3 DL1(DADFA3)
CN 53254-0272 2P RED DB2-08980-50A ASSY LPH-CBL 3 530mm PS119EL1
SBS PS181FL17 RED 177626-3 Z075111800
LED HEAD (KYOCERA) (1-n connection) 250mm P21 DA1:230mm P146 B080-1 3 520mm Z076499900 [AMP]
Z90-55180-00 A091 40 FFC P4 +FBS:270mm B6B-PH-K CBL-ASSY SBS
FH12-40S-0.5SV +rear:50mm DB2-08370-40A Except USA Except USA DL2(DADFREG)
[HIROSE] 550 3 630mm PS119EL1
(HRS No.586-0566-900) A091 40 FFC P5 51090-0500 MBS EY3A-3051 BROWN 177626-3 Z075111800
P145 3 600mm Z903593650 [AMP] USA Only
TFL-100K-22-0250(W5) B5B-PH-K CBL-ASSY SBS-USA
Z90-55073-00 DB2-08380-50B USA Only 53325-0510 USA Only 51005-0200 STAMPER
P1484 C040 2 450mm Z904819500
PCB PCL DA5-08010-50 PCB CONN PCL P149 B090 2 HEATER B2B-PH-K CBL-ASSY STAMPER
DA50801050H P3 DB2-08160-50 P6 53258-0210 (Heater attached) Z903755550 DB5-08430-50B
DS2
P1486 C060 3 560mm SG-2482A
PCB LIME DA4-08013-50
B6B-PH-K CBL-ASSY DS2 S3B-PH-K Z903777750
DA40801050G P2 P7
DHB-RD50-S13NN-4.9 DHB-PB50-S13NN DB5-08440-50C
DRS
3 450mm SG-2482A
FLASH WRITER JIG PCB DPRAM I/F D000819050 S3B-PH-K Z903777750
A150 16 P18
DCB5161050A 100mm B16B-PHDSS
(DCB-70317-50A) DS1
PCB NCU DAA 2NDDB5-0813X-50 PCB EXT LINE2 DA5-18020-50
P1487 C070 3 260mm SG-2482A
LINE P90 A100 26 500mm(A3) P8
B3B-PH-K DCB-70326-50A S3B-PH-K Z903777750
B28B-PHDSS DCB-52850-50A XH3A-6841-4 XH3B-6841-4
TEL (CBL-ASSY NCU DB2) (CBL-ASSY DS1)
(DB2-08990-40A) (DB5-08450-50A)
C080 180mm
EXTEL DFG-00S3B-518
(ADF ADF-MOT)
PCB PANEL B DB2-08060-50 PCB PANEL A DB2-08050-50

A210 32 1060mm P11
ASSY PANEL-CBL B32B-PHDSS
DB2-08260-40B
LCD A290
Z90-55074-00
A300 200mm
DFG-S3S3B-520
(FBS PNL-FLM)
PCB VOICE DB2-0809X-50

A240 16 180mm P22
DCB-51618-50A B16B-PHDSS
(CBL-ASSY VOICE)
(DB2-08270-50A)
PCB PRT DB2-08040-50B
PCB MAIN DB2-08010-50
P15A A131 40 140mm P150A PRT MOTOR-1[RX MOTOR] (DC)

BM40B-SRDS CBL-ASSY PRT1 BM40B-SRDS P159 E060 6 620mm 50M3203011
DB2-08300-50B B6B-EH-A DCB-20662-54A B6B-EH-A Z904868100
[f-a-e] (CBL-ASSY PRT MOTOR1) (A3)
P15B A133 20 150mm P150B 6-Blue (DB2-08470-50A)
B20B-PHDSS CBL-ASSY PRT2 B20B-PHDSS PRT MOTOR-2[RX MOTOR] (DC)
DB2-08310-50C P187 E340 6 240mm 50M3203011
B6B-EH-A DCB-20624-50A B6B-EH-A Z904868100
Paper detection sensor (1st CAS) (1-n connection) (1-n connection) [f-a-e] (CBL-ASSY PRT MOTOR2) (A3)
SG-2482A E010-A-2 3 90mm BU06P-TR-P-H E010-A-1 6 840mm P153 (DB2-08480-50A)
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K CBL-ASSY PES2 Z07-46288-00 CBL-ASSY PES1 B11B-PH-K SLR-02VF Printer cover sensor (A3)
/PES DB2-08610-50A DB2-08600-40A 11-Blue P152 E080 2 990mm 2 (Microo switch)
[I-H] B3B-EH-K CBL-ASSY INTERLOCK
List up location sensor(1st) (A3) DB2-08490-50C SLP-02V DB2-08880-40B
SG-2482A 3 140mm E400 P189
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K PCB DUPLEX DB2-08170-50 PHR-6 DUP MOTOR(A3)
P175 E260 10 280mm 6 ??? KBL42LLH286A
B10B-PH-K ASSY DUP MOTOR-CBL ZA102456A0
Paper size/Cassette open sensor (1st)(A3) )51090-0500[MOLEX] DB2-08670-40A (260mm) TOTAL 400mm
SW-186 E020-A 5 1010mm P154
Z076499500 53325-0510 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S DUP clutch(A3)
CASOP,PSIZE(4bit Type) P178 E450 2 210mm 2 (2.5K)
DB20881050A DA10857050C Z905606900
CBL-ASSY DUP CL CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
Paper supply sensor (A3)
SG-2482A E030-A 3 520mm P155 Temperature and humidity sensor
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K ASSY PSS-CBL B17B-CZHK-B-1 P188 E410 4 350mm (A3) CHS-CSC-18*
PSS DB2-08620-40A [I-H] B4B-PH-K CBL-ASSY TEMP HUMD 175489-4 Z90-55854-00
4-Blue DB2-08690-50B [AMP] CBL-ASSY TRANSFER
Developer (A3) [e] DB2-08850-50A
Developing 1 580mm HV unit ATDC SENSOR(A3) Z90-55860-00 51021-0200 Drawer Drawer (1-nconnection) PSU HV(A3) Z90-55855-00 E??? 285mm HV TRANSFER Transfer roller Transfer roller
Roller CBL-ASSY DEVHV TS0524ANK(TDK) E370 4 130mm Connector Connector E240 14 430mm P173 P171 E360 11 220mm EUKMBZ984H DB2-08890-50B
DB2-08860-50A 53047-0410 CBL-ASSY DEV 2B 2A B11B-PH-K DCB-71122-50A B11B-PH-K E??? 195mm HV CHAGER CBL-ASSY TRANSFER2
DB2-08630-50B CZHR-14V-S 11-Natural (CBL-ASSY HVPS) CBL-ASSY CHAGER
(1-n connection) (DB2-08460-50A) DB2-08840-50A EXIT roller Chassis
DRUM UNIT(A3) PCB ERS DB2-08140-50 PCB DEV DB2-08130-50 (A3) (A3) Toener catridgeON (A3) DFG-S3S3B-509
FUSE E380 3 500mm 10 60mm P172 P186 E330 3 310mm SG-2482A
Z07-65650-00 B3B-PH-K CBL-ASSY ERS B3B-PH-K B10B-PH-K B4B-EH-A B6B-PH-K CBL-ASSY TONER EMPTY S3B-PH-K Z903777750
0251.062MXL DB2-08640-50A PHR-10 CZHR-14V-S 6-Blue DB2-08700-40A CART_ON (A3) Bypass tray flapper Chassis
14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL 14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF) DFG-S3S3B-518
Z07-65106-00 Z07-65107-00 173977-3[AMP] TONER EMPTY(A3)
Paper feed clutch (B4) CZHR-03V-S 51005-0200 51006-0200 P185 3 340mm TSP15D10C-01(TDK)
(2.5K) 1st CAS 2 E160 2 790mm P156 175489-3 Z90-55859-00 Discharger brush Chassis
Z905606900 DA10857050C ASSY LU MOTOR-CBL B6B-PH-K [AMP] DFG-S3S3B-530
FCL_1 CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2 DB2-08650-40A 6-Natural
[f-G-A-e] 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S SCREW clutch (A3)
Paper register clutch (A3) CZHR-03V-S 51005-0200 51006-0200 P177 E190 2 350mm 2 (2.5K) Dup. Feed roller Chassis
(5.0K) 2 50mm 730mm P157 B4B-PH-K ASSY TONER MOTOR-CBL DA10857050C Z905606900 DFG-S3S3B-520
DA10857050C 4-Natural DB2-08710-40A CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
173977-2[AMP] Toner transfer MOTOR(A3)
List up MOTOR(1st) (A3) 173977-2[AMP] P176 2 280mm DU2432-1
DU2421-1 2 820mm P190 ZA10298900 292250-2
ZA102988A0 [AMP]
175489-2[AMP]
(1-nconnection)
Paper feed solenoid (A3) BU02P-TR-P-H
SLND TDS-F08G-35 * 2 100mm E050 2 650mm P158
Z90-45101-00 BYPASS B13B-PH-K
FCLCHH PHNR02 PHNR02
(nonpoler) ASSY BP SIZE-CBL [F-E-e] PDS
Paper detection sensor (BYPASS) DB2-08660-40E E200 3 710mm SG-2482A
SG-2482A 3 1050mm P160 B11B-PH-K ASSY JCOP-CBL S3B-PH-K Z903777750
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K 11-Red DB2-08720-40A
/BP_PES
(1-n connection) DUP Switch back sensor (A3)
PCB BPSIZE DB2-08150-50 BU05P-TR-P-H P181 3 420mm SG-2482A
BYPASS PAPER SIZE (A3) E430 640mm 5 720mm P169 S3B-PH-K Z903777750
S-1110A B5B-PH-K DCB-D0564-50A
(CBL-ASSY BPSIZE)
(DB2-08800-50A) (1-n connection) Jam access cover sensor (1st)
DUP JAM SENSOR(A3) BU03P-TR-P-H P184 P166 3 330mm SG-2482A
SG-2482A E420 420mm 3 720mm S3B-PH-K Z903777750
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K DCB-D0342-50A /JCOP
(CBL-ASSY DUP JAM)
(DB2-08680-50A) (1-1 connection) BU02P-TR-P-H SPEAKER
Mechanical counter (A3) PHNR02C (Reverse type) BU02P-TR-P-H P151 2 890mm CP057044
CNTR MZ-671 DC24V_D18 2 265mm 1 1 E210 2 920mm P179 D880862040B ZA10008870
Z903522350 2 2 PHNR03 B5B-PH-K (1-n connection) ASSY SPEAKER
ASSY FAN-CBL [J-I]
DB2-08500-40C
Process FAN(80mm dice) PHNR03 BU03P-TR-P-H
D08K-24TG_14B(AX) 1 1 3 520mm P161
ZA1-02364-40 (70mm) 3 3
PHNR03
(1-n connection)
PCB CASSETTE DB2-08100-50
P1
B15B-PH-K
P2 HEATER
B14B-PH-K Paper size SENSOR (OPTIONCASSETTE) DB2-08970-40A
P5 F040-A 5 830mm SW-186 ASSY CAS HEATER-CBL
Jam access cover sensor (2,3,4) (1-n connection) (1-n connection) B5B-PH-K ASSY EXCAS SIZE-CBL Z076499500
SG-2482A F020-A 3 410mm BU12P-TR-P-H F030-A 12 660mm P4 DB2-08510-40A CASOP , PSIZ(4bit Type)
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K CBL-ASSY EXCAS JCOP1 Z07-46283-00 CBL-ASSY EXCAS JCOP2 B12B-PH-K
DB2-08530-50B DB2-08540-50B 280mm CAS MOTOR
P6 F060 6 120mm PM55L-048-MRE6 24V
Paper jam sensor B6B-PH-K PHR6 ZA10298770
SG-2482A 3 440mm
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K
P3 51006-0200 51005-0200 CZHR-03V-S FCL_2,3,4 Paper feed clutch

List up location sensor B4B-PH-K F010-A 2 180mm 2 (2.5K) 2,3,4 CAS
SG-2482A 3 140mm CBL-ASSY EXCAS CL DA10857050C Z905606900
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K DB2-08520-50B CBL-ASSY CLUTCH2
173977-2[AMP]
List up MOTOR
Paper detection sensor (2,3 CAS) 2 170mm DU2421-1
SG-2482A 3 90mm 175489-2[AMP]
Z903777750 S3B-PH-K ZA102988A0
PES

Muratec MFX2200-2225-2700-2725 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Muratec MFX2200-2225-2700-2725 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Muratec

FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL

MURATA MACHINERY, LTD

5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1

1 ADF glass 8 Paper loading guide

15 Paper output area 20 External telephone line jack

Equipment and components shown with * are optional.

1 Drum cartridge lock lever (B4) 5 Toner cartridge

Dimensions MFX-2700 1 cassette 597.2 x 679.7 x 626.5 mm

Weight MFX-2720 1 cassette Approx. 55.8 kg

1 Feed roller 22 Transfer roller

Document detection (ADF)

Detection Action Sensor

Exposure Section: Construction and Function

1 APS sensor 8 PCB CCD

[14] [13] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7]

[1] Lower registration roller

<Motors, Clutch, Solenoids, PCBs, etc.>

ADF driver PCB Sensor

CN1 CN2 CN10

Drive Mechanism and Signals

Name (symbol) Function

The drive mechanism and signals are shown below.

[1] ADF driver PCB

Operation mode name Outline of operation Associated print mode

Forward Pickup/Delivery (Single-sided document > Simplex Printing) Operation

Formation of loop End of job

Waiting for reading

Formation of loop Reversal

Waiting for reading Formation of loop

Reading Waiting for reading

Reverse side reading Feed

Feed Idle feed

Feed End of job

b. Mixed size print mode and banner paper mode

Document Presence/Absence Detection

ADF driver PCB

Detection lever Document

ADF driver PCB

Initial Document Size Detection

Pickup roller unit Pickup roller unit

Stopper Separation pad Separation sheet

Read roller Read standby point

Pickup Unit and Stopper

Pickup motor (M2)

: Reverse rotation of motor

Pickup Motor (M2) Control

a. Top side pickup

Delivery reversal roller

Delivery reversal sensor

Read roller Read standby point

Reverse rotation Reversal standby Loop formation

Delivery reversal roller

Document Document reading

: Reverse rotation of motor

Feed Motor (M1) Control

- Motor ON/OFF control

PI6: Delivery reversal sensor

ADF driver PCB

Stamp solenoid drive signal

ADF driver PCB STMP_SOL

Document Document reading Document delivery

: Reverse rotation of motor

Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use

Note: To adjust the steps for each mode, use

Note: For adjust fax / scan mode, adjust machine

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter014,

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter014,

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 014,

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter013,